25853
|
1 GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 1992.
|
35782
|
2 Copyright (C) 1995, 2001 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
|
25853
|
3 See the end for copying conditions.
|
|
4
|
33644
|
5 For older news, see the file ONEWS.4.
|
25853
|
6
|
35782
|
7 * Emacs 19.34 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
|
|
8
|
|
9 * Changes in Emacs 19.33.
|
|
10
|
|
11 ** Bibtex mode no longer turns on Auto Fill automatically. (No major
|
|
12 mode should do that--it is the user's choice.)
|
|
13
|
|
14 ** The variable normal-auto-fill-function specifies the function to
|
|
15 use for auto-fill-function, if and when Auto Fill is turned on.
|
|
16 Major modes can set this locally to alter how Auto Fill works.
|
|
17
|
|
18 * Editing Changes in Emacs 19.32
|
|
19
|
|
20 ** C-x f with no argument now signals an error.
|
|
21 To set the fill column at the current column, use C-u C-x f.
|
|
22
|
|
23 ** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
|
|
24 conversion. If you type the abbreviation with mixed case, and it
|
|
25 matches the beginning of the expansion including case, then the
|
|
26 expansion is copied verbatim. Using SPC M-/ to copy an additional
|
|
27 word always copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is
|
|
28 all caps.
|
|
29
|
|
30 ** On a non-windowing terminal, which can display only one Emacs frame
|
|
31 at a time, creating a new frame with C-x 5 2 also selects that frame.
|
|
32
|
|
33 When using a display that can show multiple frames at once, C-x 5 2
|
|
34 does make the frame visible, but does not select it. This is the same
|
|
35 as in previous Emacs versions.
|
|
36
|
|
37 ** You can use C-x 5 2 to create multiple frames on MSDOS, just as on a
|
|
38 non-X terminal on Unix. Of course, only one frame is visible at any
|
|
39 time, since your terminal doesn't have the ability to display multiple
|
|
40 frames.
|
|
41
|
|
42 ** On Windows, set win32-pass-alt-to-system to a non-nil value
|
|
43 if you would like tapping the Alt key to invoke the Windows menu.
|
|
44 This feature is not enabled by default; since the Alt key is also the
|
|
45 Meta key, it is too easy and painful to activate this feature by
|
|
46 accident.
|
|
47
|
|
48 ** The command apply-macro-to-region-lines repeats the last defined
|
|
49 keyboard macro once for each complete line within the current region.
|
|
50 It does this line by line, by moving point to the beginning of that
|
|
51 line and then executing the macro.
|
|
52
|
|
53 This command is not new, but was never documented before.
|
|
54
|
|
55 ** You can now use Mouse-1 to place the region around a string constant
|
|
56 (something surrounded by doublequote characters or other delimiter
|
|
57 characters of like syntax) by double-clicking on one of the delimiting
|
|
58 characters.
|
|
59
|
|
60 ** Font Lock mode
|
|
61
|
|
62 *** Font Lock support modes
|
|
63
|
|
64 Font Lock can be configured to use Fast Lock mode and Lazy Lock mode (see
|
|
65 below) in a flexible way. Rather than adding the appropriate function to the
|
|
66 hook font-lock-mode-hook, you can use the new variable font-lock-support-mode
|
|
67 to control which modes have Fast Lock mode or Lazy Lock mode turned on when
|
|
68 Font Lock mode is enabled.
|
|
69
|
|
70 For example, to use Fast Lock mode when Font Lock mode is turned on, put:
|
|
71
|
|
72 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'fast-lock-mode)
|
|
73
|
|
74 in your ~/.emacs.
|
|
75
|
|
76 *** lazy-lock
|
|
77
|
|
78 The lazy-lock package speeds up Font Lock mode by making fontification occur
|
|
79 only when necessary, such as when a previously unfontified part of the buffer
|
|
80 becomes visible in a window. When you create a buffer with Font Lock mode and
|
|
81 Lazy Lock mode turned on, the buffer is not fontified. When certain events
|
|
82 occur (such as scrolling), Lazy Lock makes sure that the visible parts of the
|
|
83 buffer are fontified. Lazy Lock also defers on-the-fly fontification until
|
|
84 Emacs has been idle for a given amount of time.
|
|
85
|
|
86 To use this package, put in your ~/.emacs:
|
|
87
|
|
88 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'lazy-lock-mode)
|
|
89
|
46989
|
90 To control the package behavior, see the documentation for `lazy-lock-mode'.
|
35782
|
91
|
|
92 ** Changes in BibTeX mode.
|
|
93
|
|
94 *** For all entries allow spaces and tabs between opening brace or
|
|
95 paren and key.
|
|
96
|
|
97 *** Non-escaped double-quoted characters (as in `Sch"of') are now
|
|
98 supported.
|
|
99
|
|
100 ** Gnus changes.
|
|
101
|
|
102 Gnus, the Emacs news reader, has undergone further rewriting. Many new
|
|
103 commands and variables have been added. There should be no
|
|
104 significant incompatibilities between this Gnus version and the
|
|
105 previously released version, except in the message composition area.
|
|
106
|
|
107 Below is a list of the more user-visible changes. Coding changes
|
|
108 between Gnus 5.1 and 5.2 are more extensive.
|
|
109
|
|
110 *** A new message composition mode is used. All old customization
|
|
111 variables for mail-mode, rnews-reply-mode and gnus-msg are now
|
|
112 obsolete.
|
|
113
|
|
114 *** Gnus is now able to generate "sparse" threads -- threads where
|
|
115 missing articles are represented by empty nodes.
|
|
116
|
|
117 (setq gnus-build-sparse-threads 'some)
|
|
118
|
|
119 *** Outgoing articles are stored on a special archive server.
|
|
120
|
|
121 To disable this: (setq gnus-message-archive-group nil)
|
|
122
|
|
123 *** Partial thread regeneration now happens when articles are
|
|
124 referred.
|
|
125
|
|
126 *** Gnus can make use of GroupLens predictions:
|
|
127
|
|
128 (setq gnus-use-grouplens t)
|
|
129
|
|
130 *** A trn-line tree buffer can be displayed.
|
|
131
|
|
132 (setq gnus-use-trees t)
|
|
133
|
|
134 *** An nn-like pick-and-read minor mode is available for the summary
|
|
135 buffers.
|
|
136
|
|
137 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-mode-hook 'gnus-pick-mode)
|
|
138
|
|
139 *** In binary groups you can use a special binary minor mode:
|
|
140
|
|
141 `M-x gnus-binary-mode'
|
|
142
|
|
143 *** Groups can be grouped in a folding topic hierarchy.
|
|
144
|
|
145 (add-hook 'gnus-group-mode-hook 'gnus-topic-mode)
|
|
146
|
|
147 *** Gnus can re-send and bounce mail.
|
|
148
|
|
149 Use the `S D r' and `S D b'.
|
|
150
|
|
151 *** Groups can now have a score, and bubbling based on entry frequency
|
|
152 is possible.
|
|
153
|
|
154 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-exit-hook 'gnus-summary-bubble-group)
|
|
155
|
|
156 *** Groups can be process-marked, and commands can be performed on
|
|
157 groups of groups.
|
|
158
|
|
159 *** Caching is possible in virtual groups.
|
|
160
|
|
161 *** nndoc now understands all kinds of digests, mail boxes, rnews news
|
|
162 batches, ClariNet briefs collections, and just about everything else.
|
|
163
|
|
164 *** Gnus has a new backend (nnsoup) to create/read SOUP packets.
|
|
165
|
|
166 *** The Gnus cache is much faster.
|
|
167
|
|
168 *** Groups can be sorted according to many criteria.
|
|
169
|
|
170 For instance: (setq gnus-group-sort-function 'gnus-group-sort-by-rank)
|
|
171
|
|
172 *** New group parameters have been introduced to set list-address and
|
|
173 expiration times.
|
|
174
|
|
175 *** All formatting specs allow specifying faces to be used.
|
|
176
|
|
177 *** There are several more commands for setting/removing/acting on
|
|
178 process marked articles on the `M P' submap.
|
|
179
|
|
180 *** The summary buffer can be limited to show parts of the available
|
|
181 articles based on a wide range of criteria. These commands have been
|
|
182 bound to keys on the `/' submap.
|
|
183
|
|
184 *** Articles can be made persistent -- as an alternative to saving
|
|
185 articles with the `*' command.
|
|
186
|
|
187 *** All functions for hiding article elements are now toggles.
|
|
188
|
|
189 *** Article headers can be buttonized.
|
|
190
|
|
191 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-add-buttons-to-head)
|
|
192
|
|
193 *** All mail backends support fetching articles by Message-ID.
|
|
194
|
|
195 *** Duplicate mail can now be treated properly. See the
|
|
196 `nnmail-treat-duplicates' variable.
|
|
197
|
|
198 *** All summary mode commands are available directly from the article
|
|
199 buffer.
|
|
200
|
|
201 *** Frames can be part of `gnus-buffer-configuration'.
|
|
202
|
|
203 *** Mail can be re-scanned by a daemonic process.
|
|
204
|
|
205 *** Gnus can make use of NoCeM files to filter spam.
|
|
206
|
|
207 (setq gnus-use-nocem t)
|
|
208
|
|
209 *** Groups can be made permanently visible.
|
|
210
|
|
211 (setq gnus-permanently-visible-groups "^nnml:")
|
|
212
|
|
213 *** Many new hooks have been introduced to make customizing easier.
|
|
214
|
|
215 *** Gnus respects the Mail-Copies-To header.
|
|
216
|
|
217 *** Threads can be gathered by looking at the References header.
|
|
218
|
|
219 (setq gnus-summary-thread-gathering-function
|
|
220 'gnus-gather-threads-by-references)
|
|
221
|
|
222 *** Read articles can be stored in a special backlog buffer to avoid
|
|
223 refetching.
|
|
224
|
|
225 (setq gnus-keep-backlog 50)
|
|
226
|
|
227 *** A clean copy of the current article is always stored in a separate
|
|
228 buffer to allow easier treatment.
|
|
229
|
|
230 *** Gnus can suggest where to save articles. See `gnus-split-methods'.
|
|
231
|
|
232 *** Gnus doesn't have to do as much prompting when saving.
|
|
233
|
|
234 (setq gnus-prompt-before-saving t)
|
|
235
|
|
236 *** gnus-uu can view decoded files asynchronously while fetching
|
|
237 articles.
|
|
238
|
|
239 (setq gnus-uu-grabbed-file-functions 'gnus-uu-grab-view)
|
|
240
|
|
241 *** Filling in the article buffer now works properly on cited text.
|
|
242
|
|
243 *** Hiding cited text adds buttons to toggle hiding, and how much
|
|
244 cited text to hide is now customizable.
|
|
245
|
|
246 (setq gnus-cited-lines-visible 2)
|
|
247
|
|
248 *** Boring headers can be hidden.
|
|
249
|
|
250 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-hide-boring-headers)
|
|
251
|
|
252 *** Default scoring values can now be set from the menu bar.
|
|
253
|
|
254 *** Further syntax checking of outgoing articles have been added.
|
|
255
|
|
256 The Gnus manual has been expanded. It explains all these new features
|
|
257 in greater detail.
|
|
258
|
|
259 * Lisp Changes in Emacs 19.32
|
|
260
|
|
261 ** The function set-visited-file-name now accepts an optional
|
|
262 second argument NO-QUERY. If it is non-nil, then the user is not
|
|
263 asked for confirmation in the case where the specified file already
|
|
264 exists.
|
|
265
|
|
266 ** The variable print-length applies to printing vectors and bitvectors,
|
|
267 as well as lists.
|
|
268
|
|
269 ** The new function keymap-parent returns the parent keymap
|
|
270 of a given keymap.
|
|
271
|
|
272 ** The new function set-keymap-parent specifies a new parent for a
|
|
273 given keymap. The arguments are KEYMAP and PARENT. PARENT must be a
|
|
274 keymap or nil.
|
|
275
|
|
276 ** Sometimes menu keymaps use a command name, a symbol, which is really
|
|
277 an automatically generated alias for some other command, the "real"
|
|
278 name. In such a case, you should give that alias symbol a non-nil
|
|
279 menu-alias property. That property tells the menu system to look for
|
|
280 equivalent keys for the real name instead of equivalent keys for the
|
|
281 alias.
|
|
282
|
|
283 * Editing Changes in Emacs 19.31
|
|
284
|
|
285 ** Freedom of the press restricted in the United States.
|
|
286
|
|
287 Emacs has been censored in accord with the Communications Decency Act.
|
|
288 This includes removing some features of the doctor program. That law
|
|
289 was described by its supporters as a ban on pornography, but it bans
|
|
290 far more than that. The Emacs distribution has never contained any
|
|
291 pornography, but parts of it were nonetheless prohibited.
|
|
292
|
|
293 For information on US government censorship of the Internet, and what
|
|
294 you can do to bring back freedom of the press, see the web site
|
|
295 `http://www.vtw.org/'.
|
|
296
|
|
297 ** A note about C mode indentation customization.
|
|
298
|
|
299 The old (Emacs 19.29) ways of specifying a C indentation style
|
|
300 do not normally work in the new implementation of C mode.
|
|
301 It has its own methods of customizing indentation, which are
|
|
302 much more powerful than the old C mode. See the Editing Programs
|
|
303 chapter of the manual for details.
|
|
304
|
|
305 However, you can load the library cc-compat to make the old
|
|
306 customization variables take effect.
|
|
307
|
|
308 ** Marking with the mouse.
|
|
309
|
|
310 When you mark a region with the mouse, the region now remains
|
|
311 highlighted until the next input event, regardless of whether you are
|
|
312 using M-x transient-mark-mode.
|
|
313
|
|
314 ** Improved Windows NT/95 support.
|
|
315
|
|
316 *** Emacs now supports scroll bars on Windows NT and Windows 95.
|
|
317
|
|
318 *** Emacs now supports subprocesses on Windows 95. (Subprocesses used
|
|
319 to work on NT only and not on 95.)
|
|
320
|
|
321 *** There are difficulties with subprocesses, though, due to problems
|
|
322 in Windows, beyond the control of Emacs. They work fine as long as
|
|
323 you run Windows applications. The problems arise when you run a DOS
|
|
324 application in a subprocesses. Since current shells run as DOS
|
|
325 applications, these problems are significant.
|
|
326
|
|
327 If you run a DOS application in a subprocess, then the application is
|
|
328 likely to busy-wait, which means that your machine will be 100% busy.
|
|
329 However, if you don't mind the temporary heavy load, the subprocess
|
|
330 will work OK as long as you tell it to terminate before you start any
|
|
331 other DOS application as a subprocess.
|
|
332
|
|
333 Emacs is unable to terminate or interrupt a DOS subprocess.
|
|
334 You have to do this by providing input directly to the subprocess.
|
|
335
|
|
336 If you run two DOS applications at the same time in two separate
|
|
337 subprocesses, even if one of them is asynchronous, you will probably
|
|
338 have to reboot your machine--until then, it will remain 100% busy.
|
|
339 Windows simply does not cope when one Windows process tries to run two
|
|
340 separate DOS subprocesses. Typing CTL-ALT-DEL and then choosing
|
|
341 Shutdown seems to work although it may take a few minutes.
|
|
342
|
|
343 ** M-x resize-minibuffer-mode.
|
|
344
|
|
345 This command, not previously mentioned in NEWS, toggles a mode in
|
|
346 which the minibuffer window expands to show as many lines as the
|
|
347 minibuffer contains.
|
|
348
|
|
349 ** `title' frame parameter and resource.
|
|
350
|
|
351 The `title' X resource now specifies just the frame title, nothing else.
|
|
352 It does not affect the name used for looking up other X resources.
|
|
353 It works by setting the new `title' frame parameter, which likewise
|
|
354 affects just the displayed title of the frame.
|
|
355
|
|
356 The `name' parameter continues to do what it used to do:
|
|
357 it specifies the frame name for looking up X resources,
|
|
358 and also serves as the default for the displayed title
|
|
359 when the `title' parameter is unspecified or nil.
|
|
360
|
|
361 ** Emacs now uses the X toolkit by default, if you have a new
|
|
362 enough version of X installed (X11R5 or newer).
|
|
363
|
|
364 ** When you compile Emacs with the Motif widget set, Motif handles the
|
|
365 F10 key by activating the menu bar. To avoid confusion, the usual
|
|
366 Emacs binding of F10 is replaced with a no-op when using Motif.
|
|
367
|
|
368 If you want to be able to use F10 in Emacs, you can rebind the Motif
|
|
369 menubar to some other key which you don't use. To do so, add
|
|
370 something like this to your X resources file. This example rebinds
|
|
371 the Motif menu bar activation key to S-F12:
|
|
372
|
|
373 Emacs*defaultVirtualBindings: osfMenuBar : Shift<Key>F12
|
|
374
|
|
375 ** In overwrite mode, DEL now inserts spaces in most cases
|
|
376 to replace the characters it "deletes".
|
|
377
|
|
378 ** The Rmail summary now shows the number of lines in each message.
|
|
379
|
|
380 ** Rmail has a new command M-x unforward-rmail-message, which extracts
|
|
381 a forwarded message from the message that forwarded it. To use it,
|
|
382 select a message which contains a forwarded message and then type the command.
|
|
383 It inserts the forwarded message as a separate Rmail message
|
|
384 immediately after the selected one.
|
|
385
|
|
386 This command also undoes the textual modifications that are standardly
|
|
387 made, as part of forwarding, by Rmail and other mail reader programs.
|
|
388
|
|
389 ** Turning off saving of .saves-... files in your home directory.
|
|
390
|
|
391 Each Emacs session writes a file named .saves-... in your home
|
|
392 directory to record which files M-x recover-session should recover.
|
|
393 If you exit Emacs normally with C-x C-c, it deletes that file. If
|
|
394 Emacs or the operating system crashes, the file remains for M-x
|
|
395 recover-session.
|
|
396
|
|
397 You can turn off the writing of these files by setting
|
|
398 auto-save-list-file-name to nil. If you do this, M-x recover-session
|
|
399 will not work.
|
|
400
|
|
401 Some previous Emacs versions failed to delete these files even on
|
|
402 normal exit. This is fixed now. If you are thinking of turning off
|
|
403 this feature because of past experiences with versions that had this
|
|
404 bug, it would make sense to check whether you still want to do so
|
|
405 now that the bug is fixed.
|
|
406
|
|
407 ** Changes to Version Control (VC)
|
|
408
|
|
409 There is a new variable, vc-follow-symlinks. It indicates what to do
|
|
410 when you visit a link to a file that is under version control.
|
|
411 Editing the file through the link bypasses the version control system,
|
|
412 which is dangerous and probably not what you want.
|
|
413
|
|
414 If this variable is t, VC follows the link and visits the real file,
|
|
415 telling you about it in the echo area. If it is `ask' (the default),
|
|
416 VC asks for confirmation whether it should follow the link. If nil,
|
|
417 the link is visited and a warning displayed.
|
|
418
|
|
419 ** iso-acc.el now lets you specify a choice of language.
|
|
420 Languages include "latin-1" (the default) and "latin-2" (which
|
|
421 is designed for entering ISO Latin-2 characters).
|
|
422
|
|
423 There are also choices for specific human languages such as French and
|
|
424 Portuguese. These are subsets of Latin-1, which differ in that they
|
|
425 enable only the accent characters needed for particular language.
|
|
426 The other accent characters, not needed for the chosen language,
|
|
427 remain normal.
|
|
428
|
|
429 ** Posting articles and sending mail now has M-TAB completion on various
|
|
430 header fields (Newsgroups, To, CC, ...).
|
|
431
|
|
432 Completion in the Newsgroups header depends on the list of groups
|
|
433 known to your news reader. Completion in the Followup-To header
|
|
434 offers those groups which are in the Newsgroups header, since
|
|
435 Followup-To usually just holds one of those.
|
|
436
|
|
437 Completion in fields that hold mail addresses works based on the list
|
|
438 of local users plus your aliases. Additionally, if your site provides
|
|
439 a mail directory or a specific host to use for any unrecognized user
|
|
440 name, you can arrange to query that host for completion also. (See the
|
|
441 documentation of variables `mail-directory-process' and
|
|
442 `mail-directory-stream'.)
|
|
443
|
|
444 ** A greatly extended sgml-mode offers new features such as (to be configured)
|
|
445 skeletons with completing read for tags and attributes, typing named
|
|
446 characters including optionally all 8bit characters, making tags invisible
|
|
447 with optional alternate display text, skipping and deleting tag(pair)s.
|
|
448
|
|
449 Note: since Emacs' syntax feature cannot limit the special meaning of ', " and
|
|
450 - to inside <>, for some texts the result, especially of font locking, may be
|
|
451 wrong (see `sgml-specials' if you get wrong results).
|
|
452
|
|
453 The derived html-mode configures this with tags and attributes more or
|
|
454 less HTML3ish. It also offers optional quick keys like C-c 1 for
|
|
455 headline or C-c u for unordered list (see `html-quick-keys'). Edit /
|
|
456 Text Properties / Face or M-g combinations create tags as applicable.
|
|
457 Outline minor mode is supported and level 1 font-locking tries to
|
|
458 fontify tag contents (which only works when they fit on one line, due
|
|
459 to a limitation in font-lock).
|
|
460
|
|
461 External viewing via browse-url can occur automatically upon saving.
|
|
462
|
|
463 ** M-x imenu-add-to-menubar now adds to the menu bar for the current
|
|
464 buffer only. If you want to put an Imenu item in the menu bar for all
|
|
465 buffers that use a particular major mode, use the mode hook, as in
|
|
466 this example:
|
|
467
|
|
468 (add-hook 'emacs-lisp-mode-hook
|
|
469 '(lambda () (imenu-add-to-menubar "Index")))
|
|
470
|
|
471 ** Changes in BibTeX mode.
|
|
472
|
|
473 *** Field names may now contain digits, hyphens, and underscores.
|
|
474
|
|
475 *** Font Lock mode is now supported.
|
|
476
|
|
477 *** bibtex-make-optional-field is no longer interactive.
|
|
478
|
|
479 *** If bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is non-nil, inserting new
|
|
480 entries is now done with a faster algorithm. However, inserting
|
|
481 will fail in this case if the buffer contains invalid entries or
|
|
482 isn't in sorted order, so you should finish each entry with C-c C-c
|
|
483 (bibtex-close-entry) after you have inserted or modified it.
|
|
484 The default value of bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is nil.
|
|
485
|
|
486 *** Function `show-all' is no longer bound to a key, since C-u C-c C-q
|
|
487 does the same job.
|
|
488
|
|
489 *** Entries with quotes inside quote-delimited fields (as `author =
|
|
490 "Stefan Sch{\"o}f"') are now supported.
|
|
491
|
|
492 *** Case in field names doesn't matter anymore when searching for help
|
|
493 text.
|
|
494
|
|
495 ** Font Lock mode
|
|
496
|
|
497 *** Global Font Lock mode
|
|
498
|
|
499 Font Lock mode can be turned on globally, in buffers that support it, by the
|
|
500 new command global-font-lock-mode. You can use the new variable
|
|
501 font-lock-global-modes to control which modes have Font Lock mode automagically
|
|
502 turned on. By default, this variable is set so that Font Lock mode is turned
|
|
503 on globally where the buffer mode supports it.
|
|
504
|
|
505 For example, to automagically turn on Font Lock mode where supported, put:
|
|
506
|
|
507 (global-font-lock-mode t)
|
|
508
|
|
509 in your ~/.emacs.
|
|
510
|
|
511 *** Local Refontification
|
|
512
|
|
513 In Font Lock mode, editing a line automatically refontifies that line only.
|
|
514 However, if your change alters the syntactic context for following lines,
|
|
515 those lines remain incorrectly fontified. To refontify them, use the new
|
|
516 command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block).
|
|
517
|
|
518 In certain major modes, M-g M-g refontifies the entire current function.
|
|
519 (The variable font-lock-mark-block-function controls how to find the
|
|
520 current function.) In other major modes, M-g M-g refontifies 16 lines
|
|
521 above and below point.
|
|
522
|
|
523 With a prefix argument N, M-g M-g refontifies N lines above and below point.
|
|
524
|
|
525 ** Follow mode
|
|
526
|
|
527 Follow mode is a new minor mode combining windows showing the same
|
|
528 buffer into one tall "virtual window". The windows are typically two
|
|
529 side-by-side windows. Follow mode makes them scroll together as if
|
|
530 they were a unit. To use it, go to a frame with just one window,
|
|
531 split it into two side-by-side windows using C-x 3, and then type M-x
|
|
532 follow-mode.
|
|
533
|
|
534 M-x follow-mode turns off Follow mode if it is already enabled.
|
|
535
|
|
536 To display two side-by-side windows and activate Follow mode, use the
|
|
537 command M-x follow-delete-other-windows-and-split.
|
|
538
|
|
539 ** hide-show changes.
|
|
540
|
|
541 The hooks hs-hide-hooks and hs-show-hooks have been renamed
|
|
542 to hs-hide-hook and hs-show-hook, to follow the convention for
|
|
543 normal hooks.
|
|
544
|
|
545 ** Simula mode now has a menu containing the most important commands.
|
|
546 The new command simula-indent-exp is bound to C-M-q.
|
|
547
|
|
548 ** etags can now handle programs written in Erlang. Files are
|
|
549 recognised by the extensions .erl and .hrl. The tagged lines are
|
|
550 those that begin a function, record, or macro.
|
|
551
|
|
552 ** MSDOS Changes
|
|
553
|
|
554 *** It is now possible to compile Emacs with the version 2 of DJGPP.
|
|
555 Compilation with DJGPP version 1 also still works.
|
|
556
|
|
557 *** The documentation of DOS-specific aspects of Emacs was rewritten
|
|
558 and expanded; see the ``MS-DOS'' node in the on-line docs.
|
|
559
|
|
560 *** Emacs now uses ~ for backup file names, not .bak.
|
|
561
|
|
562 *** You can simulate mouse-3 on two-button mice by simultaneously
|
|
563 pressing both mouse buttons.
|
|
564
|
|
565 *** A number of packages and commands which previously failed or had
|
|
566 restricted functionality on MS-DOS, now work. The most important ones
|
|
567 are:
|
|
568
|
|
569 **** Printing (both with `M-x lpr-buffer' and with `ps-print' package)
|
|
570 now works.
|
|
571
|
|
572 **** `Ediff' works (in a single-frame mode).
|
|
573
|
|
574 **** `M-x display-time' can be used on MS-DOS (due to the new
|
|
575 implementation of Emacs timers, see below).
|
|
576
|
|
577 **** `Dired' supports Unix-style shell wildcards.
|
|
578
|
|
579 **** The `c-macro-expand' command now works as on other platforms.
|
|
580
|
|
581 **** `M-x recover-session' works.
|
|
582
|
|
583 **** `M-x list-colors-display' displays all the available colors.
|
|
584
|
|
585 **** The `TPU-EDT' package works.
|
|
586
|
|
587 * Lisp changes in Emacs 19.31.
|
|
588
|
|
589 ** The function using-unix-filesystems on Windows NT and Windows 95
|
|
590 tells Emacs to read and write files assuming that they reside on a
|
|
591 remote Unix filesystem. No CR/LF translation is done on any files in
|
|
592 this case. Invoking using-unix-filesystems with t activates this
|
|
593 behavior, and invoking it with any other value deactivates it.
|
|
594
|
|
595 ** Change in system-type and system-configuration values.
|
|
596
|
|
597 The value of system-type on a Linux-based GNU system is now `lignux',
|
|
598 not `linux'. This means that some programs which use `system-type'
|
|
599 need to be changed. The value of `system-configuration' will also
|
|
600 be different.
|
|
601
|
|
602 It is generally recommended to use `system-configuration' rather
|
|
603 than `system-type'.
|
|
604
|
|
605 See the file LINUX-GNU in this directory for more about this.
|
|
606
|
|
607 ** The functions shell-command and dired-call-process
|
|
608 now run file name handlers for default-directory, if it has them.
|
|
609
|
|
610 ** Undoing the deletion of text now restores the positions of markers
|
|
611 that pointed into or next to the deleted text.
|
|
612
|
|
613 ** Timers created with run-at-time now work internally to Emacs, and
|
|
614 no longer use a separate process. Therefore, they now work more
|
|
615 reliably and can be used for shorter time delays.
|
|
616
|
|
617 The new function run-with-timer is a convenient way to set up a timer
|
|
618 to run a specified amount of time after the present. A call looks
|
|
619 like this:
|
|
620
|
|
621 (run-with-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
|
|
622
|
|
623 SECS says how many seconds should elapse before the timer happens.
|
|
624 It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the timer
|
|
625 becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments ARGS.
|
|
626
|
|
627 REPEAT gives the interval for repeating the timer (measured in
|
|
628 seconds). It may be an integer or a floating point number. nil or 0
|
|
629 means don't repeat at all--call FUNCTION just once.
|
|
630
|
|
631 *** with-timeout provides an easy way to do something but give
|
|
632 up if too much time passes.
|
|
633
|
|
634 (with-timeout (SECONDS TIMEOUT-FORMS...) BODY...)
|
|
635
|
|
636 This executes BODY, but gives up after SECONDS seconds.
|
|
637 If it gives up, it runs the TIMEOUT-FORMS and returns the value
|
|
638 of the last one of them. Normally it returns the value of the last
|
|
639 form in BODY.
|
|
640
|
|
641 *** You can now arrange to call a function whenever Emacs is idle for
|
|
642 a certain length of time. To do this, call run-with-idle-timer. A
|
|
643 call looks like this:
|
|
644
|
|
645 (run-with-idle-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
|
|
646
|
|
647 SECS says how many seconds of idleness should elapse before the timer
|
|
648 runs. It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the
|
|
649 timer becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments
|
|
650 ARGS.
|
|
651
|
|
652 Emacs becomes idle whenever it finishes executing a keyboard or mouse
|
|
653 command. It remains idle until it receives another keyboard or mouse
|
|
654 command.
|
|
655
|
|
656 REPEAT, if non-nil, means this timer should be activated again each
|
|
657 time Emacs becomes idle and remains idle for SECS seconds The timer
|
|
658 does not repeat if Emacs *remains* idle; it runs at most once after
|
|
659 each time Emacs becomes idle.
|
|
660
|
|
661 If REPEAT is nil, the timer runs just once, the first time Emacs is
|
|
662 idle for SECS seconds.
|
|
663
|
|
664 *** post-command-idle-hook is now obsolete; you shouldn't use it at
|
|
665 all, because it interferes with the idle timer mechanism. If your
|
|
666 programs use post-command-idle-hook, convert them to use idle timers
|
|
667 instead.
|
|
668
|
|
669 *** y-or-n-p-with-timeout lets you ask a question but give up if
|
|
670 there is no answer within a certain time.
|
|
671
|
|
672 (y-or-n-p-with-timeout PROMPT SECONDS DEFAULT-VALUE)
|
|
673
|
|
674 asks the question PROMPT (just like y-or-n-p). If the user answers
|
|
675 within SECONDS seconds, it returns the answer that the user gave.
|
|
676 Otherwise it gives up after SECONDS seconds, and returns DEFAULT-VALUE.
|
|
677
|
|
678 ** Minor change to `encode-time': you can now pass more than seven
|
|
679 arguments. If you do that, the first six arguments have the usual
|
|
680 meaning, the last argument is interpreted as the time zone, and the
|
|
681 arguments in between are ignored.
|
|
682
|
|
683 This means that it works to use the list returned by `decode-time' as
|
|
684 the list of arguments for `encode-time'.
|
|
685
|
|
686 ** The default value of load-path now includes the directory
|
|
687 /usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp In addition to
|
|
688 /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp. You can use this new directory for
|
|
689 site-specific Lisp packages that belong with a particular Emacs
|
|
690 version.
|
|
691
|
|
692 It is not unusual for a Lisp package that works well in one Emacs
|
|
693 version to cause trouble in another. Sometimes packages need updating
|
|
694 for incompatible changes; sometimes they look at internal data that
|
|
695 has changed; sometimes the package has been installed in Emacs itself
|
|
696 and the installed version should be used. Whatever the reason for the
|
|
697 problem, this new feature makes it easier to solve.
|
|
698
|
|
699 ** When your program contains a fixed file name (like .completions or
|
|
700 .abbrev.defs), the file name usually needs to be different on operating
|
|
701 systems with limited file name syntax.
|
|
702
|
|
703 Now you can avoid ad-hoc conditionals by using the function
|
|
704 convert-standard-filename to convert the file name to a proper form
|
|
705 for each operating system. Here is an example of use, from the file
|
|
706 completions.el:
|
|
707
|
|
708 (defvar save-completions-file-name
|
|
709 (convert-standard-filename "~/.completions")
|
|
710 "*The filename to save completions to.")
|
|
711
|
|
712 This sets the variable save-completions-file-name to a value that
|
|
713 depends on the operating system, because the definition of
|
|
714 convert-standard-filename depends on the operating system. On
|
|
715 Unix-like systems, it returns the specified file name unchanged. On
|
|
716 MS-DOS, it adapts the name to fit the limitations of that system.
|
|
717
|
|
718 ** The interactive spec N now returns the numeric prefix argument
|
|
719 rather than the raw prefix argument. (It still reads a number using the
|
|
720 minibuffer if there is no prefix argument at all.)
|
|
721
|
|
722 ** When a process is deleted, this no longer disconnects the process
|
|
723 marker from its buffer position.
|
|
724
|
|
725 ** The variable garbage-collection-messages now controls whether
|
|
726 Emacs displays a message at the beginning and end of garbage collection.
|
|
727 The default is nil, meaning there are no messages.
|
|
728
|
|
729 ** The variable debug-ignored-errors specifies certain kinds of errors
|
|
730 that should not enter the debugger. Its value is a list of error
|
|
731 condition symbols and/or regular expressions. If the error has any
|
|
732 of the condition symbols listed, or if any of the regular expressions
|
|
733 matches the error message, then that error does not enter the debugger,
|
|
734 regardless of the value of debug-on-error.
|
|
735
|
|
736 This variable is initialized to match certain common but uninteresting
|
|
737 errors that happen often during editing.
|
|
738
|
|
739 ** The new function error-message-string converts an error datum
|
|
740 into its error message. The error datum is what condition-case
|
|
741 puts into the variable, to describe the error that happened.
|
|
742
|
|
743 ** Anything that changes which buffer appears in a given window
|
|
744 now runs the window-scroll-functions for that window.
|
|
745
|
|
746 ** The new function get-buffer-window-list returns a list of windows displaying
|
|
747 a buffer. The function is called with the buffer (a buffer object or a buffer
|
|
748 name) and two optional arguments specifying the minibuffer windows and frames
|
|
749 to search. Therefore this function takes optional args like next-window etc.,
|
|
750 and not get-buffer-window.
|
|
751
|
|
752 ** buffer-substring now runs the hook buffer-access-fontify-functions,
|
|
753 calling each function with two arguments--the range of the buffer
|
|
754 being accessed. buffer-substring-no-properties does not call them.
|
|
755
|
|
756 If you use this feature, you should set the variable
|
|
757 buffer-access-fontified-property to a non-nil symbol, which is a
|
|
758 property name. Then, if all the characters in the buffer range have a
|
|
759 non-nil value for that property, the buffer-access-fontify-functions
|
|
760 are not called. When called, these functions should put a non-nil
|
|
761 property on the text that they fontify, so that they won't get called
|
|
762 over and over for the same text.
|
|
763
|
|
764 ** Changes in lisp-mnt.el
|
|
765
|
|
766 *** The lisp-mnt package can now recognize file headers that are written
|
|
767 in the formats used by the `what' command and the RCS `ident' command:
|
|
768
|
|
769 ;; @(#) HEADER: text
|
|
770 ;; $HEADER: text $
|
|
771
|
|
772 in addition to the normal
|
|
773
|
|
774 ;; HEADER: text
|
|
775
|
|
776 *** The commands lm-verify and lm-synopsis are now interactive. lm-verify
|
|
777 checks that the library file has proper sections and headers, and
|
|
778 lm-synopsis extracts first line "synopsis'"information.
|
|
779
|
|
780
|
|
781
|
25853
|
782 * Editing Changes in Emacs 19.30.
|
|
783
|
|
784 ** Be sure to recompile your byte-compiled Emacs Lisp files
|
|
785 if you last compiled them with Emacs 19.28 or earlier.
|
|
786 You can use M-x byte-force-recompile to recompile all the .elc files
|
|
787 in a specified directory.
|
|
788
|
|
789 ** Emacs now provides multiple-frame support on Windows NT
|
|
790 and Windows 95.
|
|
791
|
|
792 ** M-x column-number-mode toggles a minor mode which displays
|
|
793 the current column number in the mode line.
|
|
794
|
|
795 ** Line Number mode is now enabled by default.
|
|
796
|
|
797 ** M-x what-line now displays the line number in the accessible
|
|
798 portion of the buffer as well as the line number in the full buffer,
|
|
799 when narrowing is in effect.
|
|
800
|
|
801 ** If you type a M-x command that has an equivalent key binding,
|
|
802 the equivalent is shown in the minibuffer before the command executes.
|
|
803 This feature is enabled by default for the sake of beginning users.
|
|
804 You can turn the feature off by setting suggest-key-bindings to nil.
|
|
805
|
|
806 ** The menu bar is now visible on text-only terminals. To choose a
|
|
807 command from the menu bar when you have no mouse, type M-`
|
|
808 (Meta-Backquote) or F10. To turn off menu bar display,
|
|
809 do (menu-bar-mode -1).
|
|
810
|
|
811 ** Whenever you invoke a minibuffer, it appears in the minibuffer
|
|
812 window that the current frame uses.
|
|
813
|
|
814 Emacs can only use one minibuffer window at a time. If you activate
|
|
815 the minibuffer while a minibuffer window is active in some other
|
|
816 frame, the outer minibuffer window disappears while the inner one is
|
|
817 active.
|
|
818
|
|
819 ** Echo area messages always appear in the minibuffer window that the
|
|
820 current frame uses. If a minibuffer is active in some other frame,
|
|
821 the echo area message does not hide it even temporarily.
|
|
822
|
|
823 ** The minibuffer now has a menu-bar menu. You can use it to exit or
|
|
824 abort the minibuffer, or to ask for completion.
|
|
825
|
|
826 ** Dead-key and composite character processing is done in the standard
|
|
827 X11R6 manner (through the default "input method" using the
|
|
828 /usr/lib/X11/locale/*/Compose databases of key combinations). I.e. if
|
|
829 it works in xterm, it should also work in emacs now.
|
|
830
|
|
831 ** Mouse changes
|
|
832
|
|
833 *** You can now use the mouse when running Emacs in an xterm.
|
|
834 Use M-x xterm-mouse-mode to let emacs take control over the mouse.
|
|
835
|
|
836 *** C-mouse-1 now once again provides a menu of buffers to select.
|
|
837 S-mouse-1 is now the way to select a default font for the frame.
|
|
838
|
|
839 *** There is a new mouse-scroll-min-lines variable to control the
|
|
840 minimum number of lines scrolled by dragging the mouse outside a
|
|
841 window's edge.
|
|
842
|
|
843 *** Dragging mouse-1 on a vertical line that separates windows
|
|
844 now moves the line, thus changing the widths of the two windows.
|
|
845 (This feature is available only if you don't have vertical scroll bars.
|
|
846 If you do use them, a scroll bar separates two side-by-side windows.)
|
|
847
|
|
848 *** Double-click mouse-1 on a character with "symbol" syntax (such as
|
|
849 underscore, in C mode) selects the entire symbol surrounding that
|
|
850 character. (Double-click mouse-1 on a letter selects a whole word.)
|
|
851
|
|
852 ** When incremental search wraps around to the beginning (or end) of
|
|
853 the buffer, if you keep on searching until you go past the original
|
|
854 starting point of the search, the echo area changes from "Wrapped" to
|
|
855 "Overwrapped". That tells you that you are revisiting matches that
|
|
856 you have already seen.
|
|
857
|
|
858 ** Filling changes.
|
|
859
|
|
860 *** If the variable colon-double-space is non-nil, the explicit fill
|
|
861 commands put two spaces after a colon.
|
|
862
|
|
863 *** Auto-Fill mode now supports Adaptive Fill mode just as the
|
|
864 explicit fill commands do. The variable adaptive-fill-regexp
|
|
865 specifies a regular expression to match text at the beginning of
|
|
866 a line that should be the fill prefix.
|
|
867
|
|
868 *** Adaptive Fill mode can take a fill prefix from the first line of a
|
|
869 paragraph, *provided* that line is not a paragraph-starter line.
|
|
870
|
|
871 Paragraph-starter lines are indented lines that start a new
|
|
872 paragraph because they are indented. This indentation shouldn't
|
|
873 be copied to additional lines.
|
|
874
|
|
875 Whether indented lines are paragraph lines depends on the value of the
|
|
876 variable paragraph-start. Some major modes set this; you can set it
|
|
877 by hand or in mode hooks as well. For editing text in which paragraph
|
|
878 first lines are not indented, and which contains paragraphs in which
|
|
879 all lines are indented, you should use Indented Text mode or arrange
|
|
880 for paragraph-start not to match these lines.
|
|
881
|
|
882 *** You can specify more complex ways of choosing a fill prefix
|
|
883 automatically by setting `adaptive-fill-function'. This function
|
|
884 is called with point after the left margin of a line, and it should
|
|
885 return the appropriate fill prefix based on that line.
|
|
886 If it returns nil, that means it sees no fill prefix in that line.
|
|
887
|
|
888 ** Gnus changes.
|
|
889
|
|
890 Gnus, the Emacs news reader, has been rewritten and expanded. Most
|
|
891 things that worked with the old version should still work with the new
|
|
892 version. Code that relies heavily on Gnus internals is likely to
|
|
893 fail, though.
|
|
894
|
|
895 *** Incompatibilities with the old GNUS.
|
|
896
|
|
897 **** All interactive commands have kept their names, but many internal
|
|
898 functions have changed names.
|
|
899
|
|
900 **** The summary mode gnus-uu commands have been moved from the `C-c
|
|
901 C-v' keymap to the `X' keymap.
|
|
902
|
|
903 **** There can now be several summary buffers active at once.
|
|
904 Variables that are relevant to each summary buffer are buffer-local to
|
|
905 that buffer.
|
|
906
|
|
907 **** Old hilit code doesn't work at all. Gnus performs its own
|
|
908 highlighting based not only on what's visible in the buffer, but on
|
|
909 other data structures.
|
|
910
|
49600
|
911 **** Old packages like `expire-kill' will no longer work.
|
25853
|
912
|
|
913 **** `C-c C-l' in the group buffer no longer switches to a different
|
|
914 buffer, but instead lists killed groups in the group buffer.
|
|
915
|
|
916 *** New features.
|
|
917
|
|
918 **** The look of all buffers can be changed by setting format-like
|
|
919 variables.
|
49600
|
920
|
25853
|
921 **** Local spool and several NNTP servers can be used at once.
|
|
922
|
|
923 **** Groups can be combined into virtual groups.
|
|
924
|
|
925 **** Different mail formats can be read much the same way as one would
|
|
926 read newsgroups. All the mail backends implement mail expiry schemes.
|
|
927
|
|
928 **** Gnus can use various strategies for gathering threads that have
|
|
929 lost their roots (thereby gathering loose sub-threads into one thread)
|
|
930 or it can go back and retrieve enough headers to build a complete
|
|
931 thread.
|
|
932
|
|
933 **** Killed groups can be read.
|
|
934
|
|
935 **** Gnus can do partial group updates - you do not have to retrieve
|
|
936 the entire active file just to check for new articles in a few groups.
|
|
937
|
|
938 **** Gnus implements a sliding scale of subscribedness to groups.
|
|
939
|
|
940 **** You can score articles according to any number of criteria. You
|
|
941 can get Gnus to score articles for you using adaptive scoring.
|
|
942
|
|
943 **** Gnus maintains a dribble buffer that is auto-saved the normal
|
|
944 Emacs manner, so it should be difficult to lose much data on what you
|
|
945 have read if your machine should go down.
|
|
946
|
|
947 **** Gnus now has its own startup file (`.gnus.el') to avoid
|
|
948 cluttering up the `.emacs' file.
|
|
949
|
|
950 **** You can set the process mark on both groups and articles and
|
|
951 perform operations on all the marked items.
|
|
952
|
|
953 **** You can grep through a subset of groups and create a group from
|
|
954 the results.
|
|
955
|
|
956 **** You can list subsets of groups using matches on group names or
|
|
957 group descriptions.
|
|
958
|
|
959 **** You can browse foreign servers and subscribe to groups from those
|
|
960 servers.
|
|
961
|
|
962 **** Gnus can pre-fetch articles asynchronously on a second connection
|
|
963 to the servers.
|
|
964
|
|
965 **** You can cache articles locally.
|
|
966
|
|
967 **** Gnus can fetch FAQs to and descriptions of groups.
|
|
968
|
|
969 **** Digests (and other files) can be used as the basis for groups.
|
|
970
|
|
971 **** Articles can be highlighted and customized.
|
|
972
|
|
973 ** Changes to Version Control (VC)
|
|
974
|
|
975 *** General changes (all backends).
|
|
976
|
|
977 VC directory listings (C-x v d) are now kept up to date when you do a
|
|
978 vc-next-action (C-x v v) on the marked files. The `g' command updates
|
|
979 the buffer properly. `=' in a VC dired buffer produces a version
|
|
980 control diff, not an ordinary diff.
|
|
981
|
|
982 *** CVS changes.
|
|
983
|
|
984 Under CVS, you no longer need to type C-x C-q before you can edit a
|
|
985 file. VC doesn't write-protect unmodified buffers anymore; you can
|
|
986 freely change them at any time. The mode line keeps track of the
|
|
987 file status.
|
|
988
|
|
989 If you do want unmodified files to be write-protected, set your
|
|
990 CVSREAD environment variable. VC sees this and behaves accordingly;
|
46989
|
991 that will give you the behavior of Emacs 19.29, similar to that under
|
25853
|
992 RCS and SCCS. In this mode, if the variable vc-mistrust-permissions
|
|
993 is nil, VC learns the modification state from the file permissions.
|
|
994 When setting CVSREAD for the first time, you should check out the
|
|
995 whole module anew, so that the file permissions are set correctly.
|
|
996
|
|
997 VC also works with remote repositories now. When you visit a file, it
|
|
998 doesn't run "cvs status" anymore, so there shouldn't be any long delays.
|
|
999
|
|
1000 Directory listings under VC/CVS have been enhanced. Type C-x v d, and
|
|
1001 you get a list of all files in or below the current directory that are
|
|
1002 not up-to-date. The actual status (modified, merge, conflict, ...) is
|
|
1003 displayed for each file. If you give a prefix argument (C-u C-x v d),
|
|
1004 up-to-date files are also listed. You can mark any number of files,
|
|
1005 and execute the next logical version control command on them (C-x v v).
|
|
1006
|
|
1007 *** Starting a new branch.
|
|
1008
|
49600
|
1009 If you try to lock a version that is not the latest on its branch,
|
25853
|
1010 VC asks for confirmation in the minibuffer. If you say no, it offers
|
|
1011 to lock the latest version instead.
|
|
1012
|
|
1013 *** RCS non-strict locking.
|
|
1014
|
|
1015 VC can now handle RCS non-strict locking, too. In this mode, working
|
|
1016 files are always writable and you needn't lock the file before making
|
|
1017 changes, similar to the default mode under CVS. To enable non-strict
|
|
1018 locking for a file, use the "rcs -U" command.
|
|
1019
|
|
1020 *** Sharing RCS master files.
|
|
1021
|
|
1022 If you share RCS subdirs with other users (through symbolic links),
|
|
1023 and you always want to work on the latest version, set
|
|
1024 vc-consult-headers to nil and vc-mistrust-permissions to `t'.
|
|
1025 Then you see the state of the *latest* version on the mode line, not
|
|
1026 that of your working file. When you do a check out, VC overwrites
|
|
1027 your working file with the latest version from the master.
|
|
1028
|
|
1029 *** RCS customization.
|
|
1030
|
|
1031 There is a new variable vc-consult-headers. If it is t (the default),
|
52401
|
1032 VC searches for RCS headers in working files (like `$Id: ONEWS,v 1.8 2003/02/04 14:30:40 lektu Exp $') and
|
25853
|
1033 determines the state of the file from them, not from the master file.
|
|
1034 This is fast and more reliable when you use branches. (The variable
|
|
1035 was already present in Emacs 19.29, but didn't get mentioned in the
|
|
1036 NEWS.)
|
|
1037
|
|
1038 ** Calendar changes.
|
|
1039
|
|
1040 *** New calendars supported: Chinese, Coptic, Ethiopic
|
|
1041
|
|
1042 Here are the commands for converting to and from these calendars:
|
|
1043
|
|
1044 gC: calendar-goto-chinese-date
|
|
1045 gk: calendar-goto-coptic-date
|
|
1046 ge: calendar-goto-ethiopic-date
|
|
1047
|
|
1048 pC: calendar-print-chinese-date
|
|
1049 pk: calendar-print-coptic-date
|
|
1050 pe: calendar-print-ethiopic-date
|
|
1051
|
|
1052 *** Printed calendars
|
|
1053
|
|
1054 Calendar mode now has commands to produce fancy printed calendars via
|
|
1055 LaTeX. You can ask for a calendar for one or more days, weeks, months
|
|
1056 or years. The commands all start with `t'; see the manual for a list
|
|
1057 of them.
|
|
1058
|
|
1059 *** New sexp diary entry type
|
|
1060
|
49600
|
1061 Reminders that apply in the days leading up to an event.
|
25853
|
1062
|
|
1063 ** The CC-mode package now provides the default C and C++ modes.
|
|
1064 See the manual for documentation of its features.
|
|
1065
|
|
1066 ** The uniquify package chooses buffer names differently when you
|
|
1067 visit multiple files with the same name (in different directories).
|
|
1068
|
|
1069 ** RMAIL now always uses the movemail program when it renames an
|
|
1070 inbox file, so that it can interlock properly with the mailer
|
|
1071 no matter where it is delivering mail.
|
|
1072
|
|
1073 ** tex-start-of-header and tex-end-of-header are now regular expressions,
|
|
1074 not strings.
|
|
1075
|
|
1076 ** To enable automatic uncompression of compressed files,
|
|
1077 type M-x auto-compression-mode. (This command used to be called
|
|
1078 toggle-auto-compression, but was not documented before.) In Lisp,
|
|
1079 you can do
|
|
1080
|
|
1081 (auto-compression-mode 1)
|
|
1082
|
|
1083 to turn the mode on.
|
|
1084
|
|
1085 ** The new pc-select package emulates the key bindings for cutting and
|
|
1086 pasting, and selection of regions, found in Windows, Motif, and the
|
|
1087 Macintosh.
|
|
1088
|
|
1089 ** Help buffers now use a special major mode, Help mode. This mode
|
|
1090 normally turns on View mode; it also provides a hook, help-mode-hook,
|
|
1091 which you can use for other customization.
|
|
1092
|
|
1093 ** Apropos now uses faces for enhanced legibility. It now describes
|
|
1094 symbol properties as well as their function definitions and variable
|
|
1095 values. You can use Mouse-2 or RET to get more information about a
|
|
1096 function definition, variable, or property.
|
|
1097
|
|
1098 ** Font Lock mode
|
|
1099
|
|
1100 *** Supports Scheme, TCL and Help modes
|
|
1101
|
|
1102 For example, to automatically turn on Font Lock mode in the *Help*
|
|
1103 buffer, put:
|
|
1104
|
|
1105 (add-hook 'help-mode-hook 'turn-on-font-lock)
|
|
1106
|
|
1107 in your ~/.emacs.
|
|
1108
|
|
1109 *** Enhanced fontification
|
|
1110
|
|
1111 The structure of font-lock-keywords is extended to allow "anchored" keywords.
|
|
1112 Typically, a keyword item of font-lock-keywords comprises a regexp to search
|
|
1113 for and information to specify how the regexp should be highlighted. However,
|
|
1114 the highlighting information is extended so that it can be another keyword
|
|
1115 item. This keyword item, its regexp and highlighting information, is processed
|
|
1116 before resuming with the keyword item of which it is part.
|
|
1117
|
|
1118 For example, a typical keyword item might be:
|
|
1119
|
|
1120 ("\\<anchor\\>" (0 anchor-face))
|
|
1121
|
|
1122 which fontifies each occurrence of the discrete word "anchor" in the value of
|
|
1123 the variable anchor-face. However, the highlighting information can be used to
|
|
1124 fontify text that is anchored to the word "anchor". For example:
|
|
1125
|
|
1126 ("\\<anchor\\>" (0 anchor-face) ("\\=[ ,]*\\(item\\)" nil nil (1 item-face)))
|
|
1127
|
|
1128 which fontifies each occurrence of "anchor" as above, but for each occurrence
|
|
1129 of "anchor", each occurrence of "item", in any following comma separated list,
|
|
1130 is fontified in the value of the variable item-face. Thus the "item" text is
|
|
1131 anchored to the "anchor" text. See the variable documentation for further
|
|
1132 information.
|
|
1133
|
|
1134 This feature is used to extend the level and quality of fontification in a
|
|
1135 number of modes. For example, C/C++ modes now have level 3 decoration that
|
|
1136 includes the fontification of variable and function names in declaration lists.
|
|
1137 In this instance, the "anchor" described in the above example is a type or
|
|
1138 class name, and an "item" is a variable or function name.
|
|
1139
|
|
1140 *** Fontification levels
|
|
1141
|
|
1142 The variables font-lock-maximum-decoration and font-lock-maximum-size are
|
|
1143 extended to specify levels and sizes for specific modes. The variable
|
|
1144 font-lock-maximum-decoration specifies the preferred level of fontification for
|
|
1145 modes that provide multiple levels (typically from "subdued" to "gaudy"). The
|
|
1146 variable font-lock-maximum-size specifies the buffer size for which buffer
|
|
1147 fontification is suppressed when Font Lock mode is turned on (typically because
|
|
1148 it would take too long).
|
|
1149
|
|
1150 These variables can now specify values for individual modes, by supplying
|
|
1151 lists of mode names and values. For example, to use the above mentioned level
|
|
1152 3 decoration for buffers in C/C++ modes, and default decoration otherwise, put:
|
|
1153
|
|
1154 (setq font-lock-maximum-decoration '((c-mode . 3) (c++-mode . 3)))
|
|
1155
|
|
1156 in your ~/.emacs. Maximum buffer size values for individual modes are
|
|
1157 specified in the same way with the variable font-lock-maximum-size.
|
|
1158
|
|
1159 *** Font Lock configuration
|
|
1160
|
|
1161 The mechanism to provide default settings for Font Lock mode are the variables
|
|
1162 font-lock-defaults and font-lock-maximum-decoration. Typically, you should
|
|
1163 only need to change the value of font-lock-maximum-decoration. However, to
|
|
1164 support Font Lock mode for buffers in modes that currently do not support Font
|
|
1165 Lock mode, you should set a buffer local value of font-lock-defaults for that
|
|
1166 mode, typically via its mode hook.
|
|
1167
|
|
1168 These variables are used by Font Lock mode to set the values of the variables
|
|
1169 font-lock-keywords, font-lock-keywords-only, font-lock-syntax-table,
|
|
1170 font-lock-beginning-of-syntax-function and font-lock-keywords-case-fold-search.
|
|
1171
|
|
1172 You need not set these variables directly, and should not set them yourself
|
|
1173 since the underlining mechanism may change in future.
|
|
1174
|
|
1175 ** Archive mode is now the default mode for various sorts of
|
|
1176 archive files (files whose names end with .arc, .lzh, .zip, and .zoo).
|
|
1177
|
|
1178 ** You can automatically update the years in copyright notice by
|
|
1179 means of (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'copyright-update).
|
|
1180 Optionally it can update the GPL version as well.
|
|
1181
|
|
1182 ** Scripts of various languages (Shell, AWK, Perl, makefiles ...) can
|
|
1183 be automatically provided with a magic number and be made executable
|
|
1184 by their respective modes under control of various user variables.
|
|
1185 The mode must call (executable-set-magic "perl") or
|
|
1186 (executable-set-magic "make" "-f"). The latter for example has no
|
|
1187 effect on [Mm]akefile.
|
|
1188
|
|
1189 ** Shell script mode now supports over 15 different shells. The new
|
|
1190 command C-c ! executes the region, and optionally beginning of script
|
|
1191 as well, by passing them to the shell.
|
|
1192
|
|
1193 Cases such as `sh' being a `bash' are now accounted for.
|
|
1194 Fontification now also does variables, the magic number and all
|
|
1195 builtin commands. Shell script mode no longer mingles `tab-width' and
|
|
1196 indentation style. The variable `sh-tab-width' has been renamed to
|
|
1197 `sh-indentation'. Empty lines are now indented like previous
|
|
1198 non-empty line, rather than just previous line.
|
|
1199
|
|
1200 The annoying $ variable prompting has been eliminated. Instead, shell
|
|
1201 script mode uses `comint-dynamic-completion' for commands, variables
|
|
1202 and filenames.
|
|
1203
|
|
1204 ** Two-column mode now automatically scrolls both buffers together,
|
|
1205 which makes it possible to eliminate the special scrolling commands
|
|
1206 that used to do so.
|
|
1207
|
|
1208 The commands that operate in two-column mode are no longer bound to
|
|
1209 keys outside that mode. f2 o will now position at the same point in
|
|
1210 associated buffer.
|
|
1211
|
|
1212 the new command f2 RET inserts a newline in both buffers, at point and
|
|
1213 at the corresponding position in the associated buffer.
|
|
1214
|
|
1215 ** Skeleton commands now work smoothly as abbrev definitions. The
|
|
1216 element < no longer exists, ' is a new element.
|
|
1217
|
|
1218 ** The autoinsert insert facility for prefilling empty files as soon
|
|
1219 as they are found has been extended to accommodate skeletons or calling
|
|
1220 functions. See the function auto-insert.
|
|
1221
|
|
1222 ** TPU-edt Changes
|
|
1223
|
|
1224 Loading tpu-edt no longer turns on tpu-edt mode. In fact, it is no
|
|
1225 longer necessary to explicitly load tpu-edt. All you need to do to
|
|
1226 turn on tpu-edt is run the tpu-edt function. Here's how to run
|
|
1227 tpu-edt instead of loading the file:
|
49600
|
1228
|
25853
|
1229 Running Emacs: Type emacs -f tpu-edt
|
|
1230 not emacs -l tpu-edt
|
|
1231
|
|
1232 Within Emacs: Type M-x tpu-edt <ret>
|
|
1233 not M-x load-library <ret> tpu-edt <ret>
|
49600
|
1234
|
25853
|
1235 In .emacs: Use (tpu-edt)
|
|
1236 not (load "tpu-edt")
|
49600
|
1237
|
25853
|
1238 The default name of the tpu-edt X key definition file has changed from
|
|
1239 ~/.tpu-gnu-keys to ~/.tpu-keys. If you don't rename the file yourself,
|
|
1240 tpu-edt will offer to rename it the first time you invoke it under
|
|
1241 x-windows.
|
|
1242
|
|
1243 ** MS-DOS Enhancements:
|
|
1244
|
|
1245 *** Better mouse control by adding the following functions [in dosfns.c]
|
|
1246 msdos-mouse-enable, msdos-mouse-disable, msdos-mouse-init.
|
|
1247
|
|
1248 *** If another foreground/background color than the default is setup in
|
|
1249 your ~/_emacs, then the screen briefly flickers with the default
|
|
1250 colors before changing to the colors you have specified. To avoid
|
|
1251 this, the EMACSCOLORS environment variable exists. It shall be
|
|
1252 defined as a string with the following elements:
|
49600
|
1253
|
25853
|
1254 set EMACSCOLORS=fb;fb
|
49600
|
1255
|
25853
|
1256 The first set of "fb" defines the initial foreground and background
|
|
1257 colors using standard dos color numbers (0=black,.., 7=white).
|
|
1258 If specified, the second set of "fb" defines the colors which are
|
|
1259 restored when you leave emacs.
|
49600
|
1260
|
25853
|
1261 *** The new SUSPEND environment variable can now be set as the shell to
|
|
1262 use when suspending emacs. This can be used to override the stupid
|
|
1263 limitation on the environment of sub-shells in MS-DOS (they are just
|
|
1264 large enough to hold the currently defined variables, not leaving
|
|
1265 room for more); to overcome this limitation, add this to autoexec.bat:
|
49600
|
1266
|
25853
|
1267 set SUSPEND=%COMSPEC% /E:2000
|
|
1268
|
|
1269 ** The escape character can now be displayed on X frames. Try
|
|
1270 this:
|
|
1271 (aset standard-display-table 27 (vector 27))
|
|
1272 after first creating a display table (you can do that by loading
|
|
1273 the disp-table library).
|
|
1274
|
|
1275 ** The new command-line option --eval specifies an expression to evaluate
|
|
1276 from the command line.
|
|
1277
|
|
1278 ** etags has now the ability to tag Perl files. They are recognised
|
|
1279 either by the .pm and .pl suffixes or by a first line which starts
|
|
1280 with `#!' and specifies a Perl interpreter. The tagged lines are
|
|
1281 those beginning with the `sub' keyword.
|
|
1282
|
|
1283 New suffixes recognised are .hpp for C++; .f90 for Fortran; .bib,
|
|
1284 .ltx, .TeX for TeX (.bbl, .dtx removed); .ml for Lisp; .prolog for
|
|
1285 prolog (.pl is now Perl).
|
|
1286
|
|
1287 ** The files etc/termcap.dat and etc/termcap.ucb have been replaced
|
|
1288 with a new, merged, and much more comprehensive termcap file. The
|
|
1289 new file should include all the special entries from the old one.
|
|
1290 This new file is under active development as part of the ncurses
|
|
1291 project. If you have any questions about this file, or problems with
|
|
1292 an entry in it, email terminfo@ccil.org.
|
|
1293
|
|
1294 * Lisp changes in Emacs 19.30.
|
|
1295
|
|
1296 ** New Data Types
|
|
1297
|
|
1298 *** There is a new data type called a char-table which is an array
|
|
1299 indexed by a character. Currently this is mostly equivalent to a
|
|
1300 vector of length 256, but in the future, when a wider character set is
|
|
1301 in use, it will be different. To create one, call
|
|
1302 (make-char-table SUBTYPE INITIAL-VALUE)
|
|
1303
|
|
1304 SUBTYPE is a symbol that identifies the specific use of this
|
|
1305 character table. It can be any of these values:
|
|
1306
|
|
1307 syntax-table
|
|
1308 display-table
|
|
1309 keyboard-translate-table
|
|
1310 case-table
|
|
1311
|
|
1312 The function `char-table-subtype' returns the subtype of a char-table.
|
|
1313 You cannot alter the subtype of an existing char-table.
|
|
1314
|
|
1315 A char-table has an element for each character code. It also has some
|
|
1316 "extra slots". The number of extra slots depends on the subtype and
|
|
1317 their use depends on the subtype. (Each subtype symbol has a
|
|
1318 `char-table-extra-slots' property that says how many extra slots to
|
|
1319 make.) Use (char-table-extra-slot TABLE N) to access extra slot N and
|
|
1320 (set-char-table-extra-slot TABLE N VALUE) to store VALUE in slot N.
|
|
1321
|
|
1322 A char-table T can have a parent, which should be another char-table
|
|
1323 P. If you look for the value in T for character C, and the table T
|
|
1324 actually holds nil, P's element for character C is used instead.
|
|
1325 The functions `char-table-parent' and `set-char-table-parent'
|
|
1326 let you read or set the parent of a char-table.
|
|
1327
|
|
1328 To scan all the values in a char-table, do not try to loop through all
|
|
1329 possible character codes. That would work for now, but will not work
|
|
1330 in the future. Instead, call map-char-table. (map-char-table
|
|
1331 FUNCTION TABLE) calls FUNCTION once for each character or character
|
|
1332 set that has a distinct value in TABLE. FUNCTION gets two arguments,
|
|
1333 RANGE and VALUE. RANGE specifies a range of TABLE that has one
|
|
1334 uniform value, and VALUE is the value in TABLE for that range.
|
|
1335
|
|
1336 Currently, RANGE is always a vector containing a single character
|
|
1337 and it refers to that character alone. In the future, other kinds
|
|
1338 of ranges will occur. You can set the value for a given range
|
|
1339 with (set-char-table-range TABLE RANGE VALUE) and examine the value
|
|
1340 for a range with (char-table-range TABLE RANGE).
|
|
1341
|
|
1342 *** Syntax tables are now represented as char-tables.
|
|
1343 All syntax tables other than the standard syntax table
|
|
1344 normally have the standard syntax table as their parent.
|
|
1345 Their subtype is `syntax-table'.
|
|
1346
|
|
1347 *** Display tables are now represented as char-tables.
|
|
1348 Their subtype is `display-table'.
|
|
1349
|
|
1350 *** Case tables are now represented as char-tables.
|
|
1351 Their subtype is `case-table'.
|
|
1352
|
|
1353 *** The value of keyboard-translate-table may now be a char-table
|
|
1354 instead of a string. Normally the char-tables used for this purpose
|
|
1355 have the subtype `keyboard-translate-table', but that is not required.
|
|
1356
|
|
1357 *** A new data type called a bool-vector is a vector of values
|
|
1358 that are either t or nil. To create one, do
|
|
1359 (make-bool-vector LENGTH INITIAL-VALUE)
|
|
1360
|
|
1361 ** You can now specify, for each marker, how it should relocate when
|
|
1362 text is inserted at the place where the marker points. This is called
|
|
1363 the "insertion type" of the marker.
|
|
1364
|
|
1365 To set the insertion type, do (set-marker-insertion-type MARKER TYPE).
|
|
1366 If TYPE is t, it means the marker advances when text is inserted. If
|
|
1367 TYPE is nil, it means the marker does not advance. (In Emacs 19.29,
|
|
1368 markers did not advance.)
|
|
1369
|
|
1370 The function marker-insertion-type reports the insertion type of a
|
|
1371 given marker. The function copy-marker takes a second argument TYPE
|
|
1372 which specifies the insertion type of the new copied marker.
|
|
1373
|
|
1374 ** When you create an overlay, you can specify the insertion type of
|
|
1375 the beginning and of the end. To do this, you can use two new
|
|
1376 arguments to make-overlay: front-advance and rear-advance.
|
|
1377
|
|
1378 ** The new function overlays-in returns a list of the overlays that
|
|
1379 overlap a specified range of the buffer. The returned list includes
|
|
1380 empty overlays at the beginning of this range, as well as within the
|
|
1381 range.
|
|
1382
|
|
1383 ** The new hook window-scroll-functions is run when a window has been
|
|
1384 scrolled. The functions in this list are called just before
|
|
1385 redisplay, after the new window-start has been computed. Each function
|
|
1386 is called with two arguments--the window that has been scrolled, and its
|
|
1387 new window-start position.
|
|
1388
|
|
1389 This hook is useful for on-the-fly fontification and other features
|
|
1390 that affect how the redisplayed text will look when it is displayed.
|
|
1391
|
|
1392 The window-end value of the window is not valid when these functions
|
|
1393 are called. The computation of window-end is byproduct of actual
|
|
1394 redisplay of the window contents, which means it has not yet happened
|
|
1395 when the hook is run. Computing window-end specially in advance for
|
|
1396 the sake of these functions would cause a slowdown.
|
|
1397
|
|
1398 The hook functions can determine where the text on the window will end
|
|
1399 by calling vertical-motion starting with the window-start position.
|
|
1400
|
|
1401 ** The new hook redisplay-end-trigger-functions is run whenever
|
|
1402 redisplay in window uses text that extends past a specified end
|
|
1403 trigger position. You set the end trigger position with the function
|
|
1404 set-window-redisplay-end-trigger. The functions are called with two
|
|
1405 arguments: the window, and the end trigger position. Storing nil for
|
|
1406 the end trigger position turns off the feature, and the trigger value
|
|
1407 is automatically reset to nil just after the hook is run.
|
|
1408
|
|
1409 You can use the function window-redisplay-end-trigger to read a
|
|
1410 window's current end trigger value.
|
|
1411
|
|
1412 ** The new function insert-file-contents-literally inserts the
|
|
1413 contents of a file without any character set translation or decoding.
|
|
1414
|
|
1415 ** The new function safe-length computes the length of a list.
|
|
1416 It never gets an error--it treats any non-list like nil.
|
|
1417 If given a circular list, it returns an upper bound for the number
|
|
1418 of elements before the circularity.
|
|
1419
|
|
1420 ** replace-match now takes a fifth argument, SUBEXP. If SUBEXP is
|
|
1421 non-nil, that says to replace just subexpression number SUBEXP of the
|
|
1422 regexp that was matched, not the entire match. For example, after
|
|
1423 matching `foo \(ba*r\)' calling replace-match with 1 as SUBEXP means
|
|
1424 to replace just the text that matched `\(ba*r\)'.
|
|
1425
|
|
1426 ** The new keymap special-event-map defines bindings for certain
|
|
1427 events that should be handled at a very low level--as soon as they
|
|
1428 are read. The read-event function processes these events itself,
|
|
1429 and never returns them.
|
|
1430
|
|
1431 Events that are handled in this way do not echo, they are never
|
|
1432 grouped into key sequences, and they never appear in the value of
|
|
1433 last-command-event or (this-command-keys). They do not discard a
|
|
1434 numeric argument, they cannot be unread with unread-command-events,
|
|
1435 they may not appear in a keyboard macro, and they are not recorded
|
|
1436 in a keyboard macro while you are defining one.
|
|
1437
|
|
1438 These events do, however, appear in last-input-event immediately after
|
|
1439 they are read, and this is the way for the event's definition to find
|
|
1440 the actual event.
|
|
1441
|
|
1442 The events types iconify-frame, make-frame-visible and delete-frame
|
|
1443 are normally handled in this way.
|
|
1444
|
|
1445 ** encode-time now supports simple date arithmetic by means of
|
|
1446 out-of-range values for its SEC, MINUTE, HOUR, DAY, and MONTH
|
|
1447 arguments; for example, day 0 means the day preceding the given month.
|
|
1448 Also, the ZONE argument can now be a TZ-style string.
|
|
1449
|
|
1450 ** command-execute and call-interactively now accept an optional third
|
|
1451 argument KEYS. If specified and non-nil, this specifies the key
|
|
1452 sequence containing the events that were used to invoke the command.
|
|
1453
|
|
1454 ** The environment variable NAME, if set, now specifies the value of
|
|
1455 (user-full-name), when Emacs starts up.
|
|
1456
|
|
1457 * User Editing Changes in Emacs 19.29
|
|
1458
|
|
1459 ** If you run out of memory.
|
|
1460
|
|
1461 If you get the error message "Virtual memory exhausted", type C-x s.
|
|
1462 That way of saving files has the least additional memory needs. Emacs
|
|
1463 19.29 keeps a reserve of memory which it makes available when this
|
|
1464 error happens; that is to ensure that C-x s can complete its work.
|
|
1465
|
|
1466 Once you have saved your data, you can exit and restart Emacs, or use
|
|
1467 M-x kill-some-buffers to free up space. If you kill buffers
|
|
1468 containing a substantial amount of text, you can go on editing.
|
|
1469
|
|
1470 Do not use M-x buffer-menu to save or kill buffers when you are out of
|
|
1471 memory, because that needs a fair amount memory itself and you may not
|
|
1472 have enough to get it started.
|
|
1473
|
|
1474 ** The format of compiled files has changed incompatibly.
|
|
1475
|
|
1476 Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19.29 normally use a new format
|
|
1477 that will not work in older Emacs versions. You can compile files
|
|
1478 in the old format if you wish; see "Changes in compilation," below.
|
|
1479
|
|
1480 ** Emacs 19.29 supports the DEC Alpha.
|
|
1481
|
|
1482 ** Emacs runs on Windows NT.
|
|
1483
|
|
1484 This port does not yet support windowing features. It works like a
|
|
1485 text-only terminal, but it does support a mouse.
|
|
1486
|
|
1487 In general, support for non-GNU-like operating systems is not a high
|
|
1488 priority for the GNU project. We merged in the support for Windows NT
|
|
1489 because that system is expected to be very widely used.
|
|
1490
|
|
1491 ** Emacs supports Motif widgets.
|
|
1492
|
|
1493 You can build Emacs with Motif widgets by specifying --with-x-toolkit=motif
|
|
1494 when you run configure.
|
|
1495
|
|
1496 Motif defines collections of windows called "tab groups", and uses the
|
|
1497 tab key and the cursor keys to move between windows in a tab group.
|
|
1498 Emacs naturally does not support this--it has other uses for the tab
|
|
1499 key and cursor keys. Emacs does not support Motif accelerators either,
|
|
1500 because it uses its normal keymap event binding features.
|
|
1501
|
|
1502 We give higher priority to operation with a free widget set than to
|
|
1503 operation with a proprietary one.
|
|
1504
|
|
1505 ** If Emacs or the computer crashes, you can recover all the files you
|
|
1506 were editing from their auto save files by typing M-x recover-session.
|
|
1507 This first shows you a list of recorded interrupted sessions. Move
|
|
1508 point to the one you choose, and type C-c C-c.
|
|
1509
|
|
1510 Then recover-session asks about each of the files that were being
|
|
1511 edited during that session, asking whether to recover that file. If
|
|
1512 you answer y, it calls recover-file, which works in its normal
|
|
1513 fashion. It shows the dates of the original file and its auto-save
|
|
1514 file and asks once again whether to recover that file.
|
|
1515
|
|
1516 When recover-session is done, the files you've chosen to recover
|
|
1517 are present in Emacs buffers. You should then save them.
|
|
1518 Only this--saving them--updates the files themselves.
|
|
1519
|
|
1520 ** Menu bar menus now stay up if you click on the menu bar item and
|
|
1521 release the mouse button within a certain amount of time. This is in
|
|
1522 the X Toolkit version.
|
|
1523
|
|
1524 ** The menu bar menus have been rearranged and split up to make for a
|
|
1525 better organization. Two new menu bar menus, Tools and Search,
|
|
1526 contain items that were formerly in the Files and Edit menus, as well
|
|
1527 as some that did not exist in the menu bar menus before.
|
|
1528
|
|
1529 ** Emacs can now display on more than one X display at the same time.
|
|
1530 Use the command make-frame-on-display to create a frame, specifying
|
|
1531 which display to use.
|
|
1532
|
|
1533 ** M-x talk-connect sets up a multi-user talk connection
|
|
1534 via Emacs. Specify the X display of the person you want to talk to.
|
|
1535 You can talk to any number of people (within reason) by using
|
|
1536 this command repeatedly to specify different people.
|
|
1537
|
|
1538 Emacs does not make a fuss about security; the people who you talk to
|
|
1539 can use all Emacs features, including visiting and editing files. If
|
|
1540 this frightens you, don't use M-x talk-connect.
|
|
1541
|
|
1542 ** The range of integer values is now at least 2**28 on all machines.
|
|
1543 This means the maximum size of a buffer is at least 2**27-1,
|
|
1544 or 134,217,727.
|
|
1545
|
|
1546 ** When you start Emacs, you can now specify option names in
|
|
1547 long GNU form (starting with `--') and you can abbreviate the names.
|
|
1548
|
|
1549 You can now specify the options in any order.
|
|
1550 The previous requirements about the order of options
|
|
1551 have been eliminated.
|
|
1552
|
|
1553 The -L or --directory option lets you specify an additional
|
|
1554 directory to search for Lisp libraries (including libraries
|
|
1555 that you specify with the -l or --load options).
|
|
1556
|
|
1557 ** Incremental search in Transient Mark mode, if the mark is already
|
|
1558 active, now leaves the mark active and does not change its position.
|
|
1559 You can make incremental search deactivate the mark once again with
|
|
1560 this expression.
|
|
1561
|
|
1562 (add-hook 'isearch-mode-hook 'deactivate-mark)
|
|
1563
|
|
1564 ** C-delete now deletes a word backwards. This is for compatibility
|
|
1565 with some editors in the PC world. (This key is not available on
|
|
1566 ordinary ASCII terminals, because C-delete is not a distinct character
|
|
1567 on those terminals.)
|
|
1568
|
|
1569 ** ESC ESC ESC is now a command to escape from various temporary modes
|
|
1570 and states.
|
|
1571
|
|
1572 ** M-x pc-bindings-mode sets up bindings compatible with many PC editors.
|
|
1573 In particular, Delete and its variants delete forward instead of backward.
|
|
1574 Use Backspace to delete backward.
|
|
1575
|
|
1576 C-Backspace kills backward a word (as C-Delete normally would).
|
|
1577 M-Backspace does undo.
|
|
1578 Home and End move to beginning and end of line
|
|
1579 C-Home and C-End move to beginning and end of buffer.
|
|
1580
|
|
1581 ** The key sequence for evaluating a Lisp expression using the minibuffer
|
|
1582 is now ESC :. It used to be ESC ESC, but we moved it to make way for
|
|
1583 the ESC ESC ESC feature, on the grounds that people who evaluate Lisp
|
|
1584 expressions are experienced users and can cope with a change.
|
|
1585 If you prefer the old ESC ESC binding, put in your `~/.emacs':
|
|
1586
|
|
1587 (global-set-key "\e\e" 'eval-expression)
|
|
1588
|
|
1589 ** The f1 function key is now equivalent to the help key. This is
|
|
1590 done with key-translation-map; delete the binding for f1 in that map
|
|
1591 if you want to use f1 for something else.
|
|
1592
|
|
1593 ** Mouse-3, in the simplest case, still sets the region. But now, it
|
|
1594 places the mark where point was, and sets point where you click.
|
|
1595 (It used to set the mark where you click and leave point alone.)
|
|
1596
|
|
1597 If you position point with Mouse-1, then scroll with the scroll bar
|
|
1598 and use Mouse-3, Mouse-3 uses the position you specified with Mouse-1
|
|
1599 even if it has scrolled off the screen (and point is no longer there).
|
|
1600 This makes it easier to select a region with the mouse which is bigger
|
|
1601 than a screenful.
|
|
1602
|
|
1603 Any editing of the buffer, and any cursor motion or scrolling for any
|
|
1604 reason other than the scroll bar, cancels the special state set up by
|
|
1605 Mouse-1--so that a subsequent Mouse-3 click will use the actual value
|
|
1606 of point.
|
|
1607
|
|
1608 ** C-mouse-3 now pops up a mode-specific menu of commands--normally
|
|
1609 the same ones available in the mode's own menu bar menus.
|
|
1610
|
|
1611 ** C-mouse-2 now pops up a menu of faces, indentation, justification,
|
|
1612 and certain other text properties. This menu is also available
|
|
1613 through the menu-bar Edit menu. It is meant for use with Enriched
|
|
1614 mode.
|
|
1615
|
|
1616 *** You can use this menu to change the face of the region.
|
|
1617 You can also set the face of the region with the new M-g command.
|
|
1618
|
49600
|
1619 *** The menu also includes commands for indenting the region,
|
25853
|
1620 which locally changes the values of left-margin and fill-column that
|
|
1621 are used.
|
|
1622
|
|
1623 *** All fill functions now indent every line to the left-margin. If
|
|
1624 there is also a fill-prefix, that goes after the margin indentation.
|
|
1625
|
|
1626 *** Open-line and newline also make sure that the lines they create
|
|
1627 are indented to the left margin.
|
|
1628
|
|
1629 *** It also allows you to set the "justification" of the region:
|
|
1630 whether it should be centered, flush right, and so forth. The fill
|
|
1631 functions (including auto-fill-mode) will maintain the justification
|
|
1632 and indentation that you request.
|
|
1633
|
|
1634 *** The new function `list-colors-display' shows you what colors are
|
|
1635 available. This is also accessible from the C-mouse-2 menu.
|
|
1636
|
|
1637 ** You can now save and load files including their faces and other
|
|
1638 text-properties by using Enriched-mode. Files are saved in an
|
|
1639 extended version of the MIME text/enriched format. You can use the
|
|
1640 menus described above, or M-g and other keyboard commands, to
|
|
1641 alter the formatting information.
|
|
1642
|
|
1643 ** C-mouse-1 now pops up the menu for changing the frame's default font.
|
|
1644
|
|
1645 ** You can input Hyper, Super, Meta, and Alt characters, as well as
|
|
1646 non-ASCII control characters, on an ASCII-only terminal.
|
|
1647 To do this, use
|
|
1648
|
|
1649 C-x @ h -- hyper
|
|
1650 C-x @ s -- super
|
|
1651 C-x @ m -- meta
|
|
1652 C-x @ a -- alt
|
|
1653 C-x @ S -- shift
|
|
1654 C-x @ c -- control
|
|
1655
|
|
1656 These are not ordinary key sequences; they operate through
|
|
1657 function-key-map, which means they can be used even in the
|
|
1658 middle of an ordinary key sequence.
|
|
1659
|
|
1660 ** Outline minor mode and Hideif mode now use C-c @ as their prefix
|
|
1661 character.
|
|
1662
|
|
1663 ** Echo area messages are now logged in the "*Messages*" buffer. The
|
|
1664 size of this buffer is limited to message-log-max lines.
|
|
1665
|
|
1666 ** RET in various special modes for read-only buffers that contain
|
|
1667 lists of items now selects the item point is on. These modes include
|
|
1668 Dired, Compilation buffers, Buffer-menu, Tar mode, and Occur mode.
|
|
1669 (In Info, RET follows the reference near point; in completion list
|
|
1670 buffers, RET chooses the completion around point.)
|
|
1671
|
|
1672 ** set-background-color now updates the modeline face in a special
|
|
1673 way. If that face was previously set up to be reverse video, the
|
|
1674 reverse of the default face, then set-background-color updates it so
|
|
1675 that it remains the reverse of the default face.
|
|
1676
|
|
1677 ** The functions raise-frame and lower-frame are now commands.
|
|
1678 When used interactively, they apply to the selected frame.
|
|
1679
|
|
1680 ** M-x buffer-menu now displays the buffer list in the selected window.
|
|
1681 Use M-x buffer-menu-other-window to display it in another window.
|
|
1682
|
|
1683 ** M-w followed by a kill command now *does not* append the text in
|
|
1684 the kill ring. In consequence, M-w followed by C-w works as you would
|
|
1685 expect: it leaves the top of the kill ring matching the region that
|
|
1686 you killed.
|
|
1687
|
|
1688 ** In Lisp mode, the C-M-x command now executes defvar forms in a
|
|
1689 special way: it unconditionally sets the variable to the specified
|
|
1690 default value, if there is one. Normal execution of defvar does not
|
|
1691 alter the variable if it already has a non-void value.
|
|
1692
|
|
1693 ** In completion list buffers, the left and right arrow keys run the
|
|
1694 new commands previous-completion and next-completion. They move one
|
|
1695 completion at a time.
|
|
1696
|
|
1697 ** While doing completion in the minibuffer, the `prior' or `pageup'
|
|
1698 key switches to the completion list window.
|
|
1699
|
|
1700 ** When you exit the minibuffer with empty contents, the empty string
|
|
1701 is not put in the minibuffer history.
|
|
1702
|
|
1703 ** The default buffer for insert-buffer is now the "first" buffer
|
|
1704 other than the current one. If you have more than one window, this
|
|
1705 is a buffer visible in another window. (Usually it is the buffer
|
|
1706 that C-M-v would scroll.)
|
|
1707
|
|
1708 ** The etags program is now capable of recording tags based on regular
|
|
1709 expressions provided on the command line.
|
|
1710
|
|
1711 This new feature allows easy support for constructs not normally
|
|
1712 handled by etags, such as the macros frequently used in big C/C++
|
|
1713 projects to define project-specific structures. It also enables the
|
|
1714 use of etags and TAGS files for languages not supported by etags.
|
|
1715
|
|
1716 The Emacs manual section on Tags contains explanations and examples
|
|
1717 for Emacs's DEFVAR, VHDL, Cobol, Postscript and TCL.
|
|
1718
|
|
1719 ** Various mode-specific commands that used to be bound to C-c LETTER
|
|
1720 have been moved.
|
|
1721
|
|
1722 *** In gnus-uu mode, gnus-uu-interactive-scan-directory is now on C-c C-d,
|
|
1723 and gnus-uu-interactive-save-current-file is on C-c C-z.
|
|
1724
|
|
1725 *** In Scribe mode, scribe-insert-environment is now on C-c C-v,
|
|
1726 scribe-chapter is on C-c C-c, scribe-subsection is on C-c C-s,
|
|
1727 scribe-section is on C-c C-t, scribe-bracket-region-be is on C-c C-e,
|
|
1728 scribe-italicize-word is on C-c C-i, scribe-bold-word is on C-c C-b,
|
|
1729 and scribe-underline-word is on C-c C-u.
|
|
1730
|
|
1731 *** In Gomoku mode, gomoku-human-takes-back is now on C-c C-b,
|
|
1732 gomoku-human-plays is on C-c C-p, gomoku-human-resigns is on C-c C-r,
|
|
1733 and gomoku-emacs-plays is on C-c C-e.
|
|
1734
|
|
1735 *** In the Outline mode defined in allout.el,
|
|
1736 outline-rebullet-current-heading is now on C-c *.
|
|
1737
|
|
1738 ** M-s in Info now searches through the nodes of the Info file,
|
|
1739 just like s. The alias M-s was added so that you can use the same
|
|
1740 command for searches in both Info and Rmail.
|
|
1741
|
|
1742 ** iso-acc.el now lets you enter inverted-! and inverted-?
|
|
1743 with the sequences ~! and ~?.
|
|
1744
|
|
1745 ** M-x compare-windows now pushes mark in both windows before
|
|
1746 it starts moving point.
|
|
1747
|
|
1748 ** There are two new commands in Dired, A (dired-do-search)
|
|
1749 and Q (dired-do-query-replace). These are similar to tags-search and
|
|
1750 tags-query-replace, but instead of searching the list of files that
|
|
1751 appears in a tags table, they search all the files marked in Dired.
|
|
1752
|
|
1753 ** Changes to dabbrev.
|
|
1754
|
|
1755 A new function, `dabbrev-completion' (bound to M-C-/), expands the
|
|
1756 unique part of an abbreviation.
|
|
1757
|
|
1758 Dabbrev now looks for expansions in other buffers, looks for symbols
|
|
1759 instead of words and it works in the minibuffer.
|
|
1760
|
|
1761 Dabbrev can be customized to work for shell scripts, with variables
|
|
1762 that sometimes have and sometimes haven't a leading "$". See the
|
|
1763 variable 'dabbrev-abbrev-skip-leading-regexp'.
|
|
1764
|
|
1765 ** In Rmail, the command rmail-input-menu has been eliminated. The
|
|
1766 feature of selecting an Rmail file from a menu is now implemented in
|
|
1767 another way.
|
|
1768
|
|
1769 ** Bookmarks changes.
|
|
1770
|
|
1771 *** It now works to set bookmarks in Info nodes.
|
|
1772
|
49600
|
1773 *** Bookmarks can have annotations; type "C-h m" after doing
|
25853
|
1774 "M-x list-bookmarks", for more information on annotations.
|
|
1775
|
|
1776 *** The bookmark-jump popup menu function is now `bookmark-menu-jump', for
|
|
1777 those who bind it to a mouse click.
|
|
1778
|
|
1779 *** The default bookmarks file name is now "~/.emacs.bmk". If you
|
|
1780 already have a bookmarks file, it will be renamed automagically when
|
|
1781 you next load it.
|
|
1782
|
|
1783 ** New package, ps-print.
|
|
1784
|
|
1785 The ps-print package generates PostScript printouts of buffers or
|
|
1786 regions, and includes face attributes such as color, underlining,
|
|
1787 boldface and italics in the printed output.
|
|
1788
|
|
1789 ** New package, msb.
|
|
1790
|
|
1791 The msb package provides a buffer-menu in the menubar with separate
|
|
1792 menus for different types of buffers.
|
|
1793
|
|
1794 ** `cpp.el' is a new library that can highlight or hide parts of a C
|
|
1795 file according to C preprocessor conditionals. To try it, run the
|
|
1796 command M-x cpp-highlight-buffer.
|
|
1797
|
|
1798 ** Changes in CC mode.
|
|
1799
|
|
1800 *** c-set-offset and related functions and variables can now accept
|
|
1801 variable symbols. Also ++ and -- which mean 2* positive and negative
|
|
1802 c-basic-offset respectively.
|
|
1803
|
|
1804 *** New variable, c-recognize-knr-p, which controls whether K&R C
|
|
1805 constructs will be recognized. Trying to recognize K&R constructs is a
|
|
1806 time hog so if you're programming strictly in ANSI C, set this
|
|
1807 variable to nil (it should already be nil in c++-mode).
|
|
1808
|
|
1809 *** New variable, c-hanging-comment-ender-p for controlling
|
|
1810 c-fill-paragraph's behavior.
|
|
1811
|
|
1812 *** New syntactic symbol: statement-case-open. This is assigned to lines
|
|
1813 containing an open brace just after a case/default label.
|
|
1814
|
|
1815 *** New variable, c-progress-interval, which controls minibuffer update
|
|
1816 message displays during long re-indention. This is a new feature
|
|
1817 which prints percentage complete messages at specified intervals.
|
|
1818
|
49600
|
1819 ** Makefile mode changes.
|
25853
|
1820
|
|
1821 *** The electric keys are not enabled by default.
|
|
1822
|
|
1823 *** There is now a mode-specific menu bar menu.
|
|
1824
|
|
1825 *** The mode supports font-lock, add-log, and imenu.
|
|
1826
|
|
1827 *** The command M-TAB does completion of target names and variable names.
|
|
1828
|
|
1829 ** icomplete.el now works more like a minor mode. Use M-x icomplete-mode
|
|
1830 to turn it on and off.
|
|
1831
|
|
1832 Icomplete now supports an `icomplete-minibuffer-setup-hook', which is
|
|
1833 run on minibuffer setup whenever icompletion will be occurring. This
|
|
1834 hook can be used to customize interoperation of icomplete with other
|
|
1835 minibuffer-specific packages, eg rsz-mini. See the doc string for
|
|
1836 more info.
|
|
1837
|
|
1838 ** Ediff change.
|
|
1839
|
|
1840 Use ediff-revision instead of vc-ediff. It also replaces rcs-ediff,
|
|
1841 for those who use that; if you want to use a version control package
|
|
1842 other than vc.el, you must set the variable
|
|
1843 ediff-version-control-package to specify which package.
|
|
1844
|
|
1845 ** VC now supports branches with RCS.
|
|
1846
|
|
1847 You can use C-u C-x C-q to select any branch or version by number.
|
|
1848 It reads the version number or branch number with the minibuffer,
|
|
1849 then checks out the file unlocked.
|
|
1850
|
|
1851 Type C-x C-q again to lock the selected branch or version.
|
|
1852 When you check in changes to that branch or version, there are two
|
|
1853 possibilities:
|
|
1854
|
|
1855 -- If you've selected a branch, or a version at the tip of a branch,
|
|
1856 then the new version adds to that branch. If you wish to create a
|
|
1857 new branch, use C-u C-x C-q to specify a version number when you check
|
|
1858 in the new version.
|
|
1859
|
|
1860 -- If you've selected an inner version which is not the latest in its
|
|
1861 branch, then the new version automatically creates a new branch.
|
|
1862
|
|
1863 ** VC now supports CVS as well as RCS and SCCS.
|
|
1864
|
|
1865 Since there are no locks in CVS, some things behave slightly
|
|
1866 different when the backend is CVS. When vc-next-action is invoked
|
|
1867 in a directory handled by CVS, it does the following:
|
|
1868
|
|
1869 If the file is not already registered, this registers it for version
|
|
1870 control. This does a "cvs add", but no "cvs commit".
|
|
1871 If the file is added but not committed, it is committed.
|
|
1872 If the file has not been changed, neither in your working area or
|
|
1873 in the repository, a message is printed and nothing is done.
|
|
1874 If your working file is changed, but the repository file is
|
|
1875 unchanged, this pops up a buffer for entry of a log message; when you
|
|
1876 finish the log message with C-c C-c, that checks in the resulting
|
|
1877 changes along with the log message as change commentary. A writable
|
|
1878 file remains in existence.
|
|
1879
|
|
1880 If vc-next-action changes the repository file, it asks you
|
|
1881 whether to merge in the changes into your working copy.
|
|
1882
|
|
1883 vc-directory, when started in a CVS file hierarchy, reports
|
|
1884 all files that are modified (and thus need to be committed).
|
|
1885 (When the backend is RCS or SCCS vc-directory reports all
|
|
1886 locked files).
|
|
1887
|
|
1888 VC has no support for running the initial "cvs checkout" to get a
|
|
1889 working copy of a module. You can only use VC in a working copy of
|
|
1890 a module.
|
|
1891
|
|
1892 You can disable the CVS support as follows:
|
|
1893
|
|
1894 (setq vc-master-templates (delq 'vc-find-cvs-master vc-master-templates))
|
|
1895
|
|
1896 or by setting vc-handle-cvs to nil.
|
|
1897
|
|
1898 This may be desirable if you run a non-standard version of CVS, or
|
|
1899 if CVS was compiled with FORCE_USE_EDITOR or (possibly)
|
|
1900 RELATIVE_REPOS.
|
|
1901
|
|
1902 ** Comint and shell mode changes:
|
|
1903
|
|
1904 *** Completion works with file names containing quoted characters.
|
|
1905
|
|
1906 File names containing special characters (such as " ", "!", etc.) that are
|
|
1907 quoted with a "\" character are recognised during completion. Special
|
|
1908 characters are quoted when they are inserted during completion.
|
|
1909
|
|
1910 *** You can use M-x comint-truncate-buffer to truncate the buffer.
|
|
1911
|
|
1912 When this command is run, the buffer is truncated to a maximum number
|
|
1913 of lines, specified by the variable comint-buffer-maximum-size. Just
|
|
1914 like the command comint-strip-ctrl-m, this can be run automatically
|
|
1915 during process output by doing this:
|
|
1916
|
|
1917 (add-hook 'comint-output-filter-functions
|
|
1918 'comint-truncate-buffer)
|
|
1919
|
|
1920 ** Telnet mode buffer name changed.
|
|
1921
|
|
1922 The buffer name for a Telnet buffer is now *telnet-HOST*, not
|
|
1923 *HOST-telnet*. This is for consistency with other Emacs packages.
|
|
1924
|
|
1925 ** M-x man (man) is now faster and more robust. On systems where the
|
|
1926 entire man page is indented, the indentation is removed.
|
|
1927
|
|
1928 The user option names that used to end in -p now end in -flag. The
|
|
1929 new names are: Man-reuse-okay-flag, Man-downcase-section-letters-flag,
|
|
1930 Man-circular-pages-flag. The Man-notify user option has been renamed to
|
|
1931 Man-notify-method and accepts one more value, `pushy', that just
|
|
1932 switches the current buffer to the manpage buffer, without switching
|
|
1933 frames nor changing your windows configuration.
|
|
1934
|
|
1935 A new user option Man-fontify-manpage-flag disables fontification
|
|
1936 (thus speeding up man) when set to nil. Default is to fontify if a
|
|
1937 window system is used. Two new user options Man-overstrike-face
|
|
1938 (default 'bold) and Man-underline-face (default 'underline) can be set
|
|
1939 to the preferred faces to be used for the words that man overstrikes
|
|
1940 and underlines. Useful for those who like coloured man pages.
|
|
1941
|
|
1942 Two new interactive functions are provided: Man-cleanup-manpage and
|
|
1943 Man-fontify-manpage. Both can be used on a buffer that contains the
|
|
1944 output of a `rsh host man manpage' command, or the output of an
|
|
1945 `nroff -man -Tman manpage' command to make them readable.
|
|
1946 Man-cleanup-manpage is faster, but does not fontify.
|
|
1947
|
|
1948 ** The new function modify-face makes it easy to specify
|
|
1949 all the attributes of a face, all at once.
|
|
1950
|
|
1951 ** Faces now support background stippling.
|
|
1952
|
|
1953 Use the command set-face-stipple to specify the stipple-pattern for a
|
|
1954 face. Use face-stipple to access the specified stipple pattern. The
|
|
1955 existing face functions now handle the stipple pattern when
|
|
1956 appropriate.
|
|
1957
|
|
1958 If you specify one of the standard gray colors as a face background
|
|
1959 color, and your display doesn't handle gray, Emacs automatically uses
|
|
1960 stipple instead to get the same effect.
|
|
1961
|
|
1962 ** Changes in Font Lock mode.
|
|
1963
|
|
1964 *** Fontification
|
|
1965
|
|
1966 Two new default faces are provided; `font-lock-variable-name-face' and
|
|
1967 `font-lock-reference-face'. The face `font-lock-doc-string-face' has
|
|
1968 been removed since it is the same as the existing
|
|
1969 `font-lock-string-face'. Where appropriate, fontification
|
|
1970 automatically uses these new faces.
|
|
1971
|
|
1972 Fontification via commands `font-lock-mode' and
|
|
1973 `font-lock-fontify-buffer' is now cleanly interruptible (i.e., with
|
|
1974 C-g). If you interrupt during the fontification process, the buffer
|
|
1975 remains in its previous modified state and all highlighting is removed
|
|
1976 from the buffer.
|
|
1977
|
|
1978 For C/C++ modes, Font Lock mode is much faster but highlights much
|
|
1979 more. Other modes are faster/more extensive/more discriminatory, or a
|
|
1980 combination of these.
|
|
1981
|
|
1982 To enable Font Lock mode, add the new function `turn-on-font-lock' in
|
|
1983 one of the following ways:
|
|
1984
|
|
1985 (add-hook 'c-mode-hook 'turn-on-font-lock)
|
|
1986
|
|
1987 Or for any visited file with:
|
|
1988
|
|
1989 (add-hook 'find-file-hooks 'turn-on-font-lock)
|
|
1990
|
|
1991 *** Supports color and grayscale displays
|
|
1992
|
|
1993 Font Lock mode supports different ways of highlighting, depending on
|
|
1994 the type of display and background shade. Attributes (face color,
|
|
1995 bold, italic and underline, and display type and background mode) can
|
|
1996 be controlled either from Emacs Lisp or X resources.
|
|
1997
|
|
1998 See the new variables `font-lock-display-type' and
|
|
1999 `font-lock-face-attributes'.
|
|
2000
|
|
2001 *** Supports more modes
|
|
2002
|
|
2003 The following modes are directly supported:
|
|
2004
|
|
2005 ada-mode, asm-mode, bibtex-mode, c++-c-mode, c++-mode, c-mode,
|
|
2006 change-log-mode, compilation-mode, dired-mode, emacs-lisp-mode,
|
|
2007 fortran-mode, latex-mode, lisp-mode, mail-mode, makefile-mode,
|
|
2008 outline-mode, pascal-mode, perl-mode, plain-tex-mode, rmail-mode,
|
|
2009 rmail-summary-mode, scheme-mode, shell-mode, slitex-mode, tex-mode,
|
|
2010 texinfo-mode.
|
|
2011
|
|
2012 See the new variables `font-lock-defaults-alist' and
|
|
2013 `font-lock-defaults'.
|
|
2014
|
|
2015 Some modes support different levels of fontification. You can choose
|
|
2016 to use the minimum or maximum available decoration by changing the
|
|
2017 value of the new variable `font-lock-maximum-decoration'.
|
|
2018
|
|
2019 Programmers are urged to make available to the community their own
|
|
2020 keywords for modes not yet supported. See font-lock.el for
|
|
2021 information about efficiency.
|
|
2022
|
|
2023 *** fast-lock
|
|
2024
|
|
2025 The fast-lock package speeds up Font Lock mode by saving font choices
|
|
2026 in associated cache files. When you visit a file with Font Lock mode
|
|
2027 and Fast Lock mode turned on for the first time, the file's buffer is
|
|
2028 fontified as normal. When certain events occur (such as exiting
|
|
2029 Emacs), Fast Lock saves the highlighting in a cache file. When you
|
|
2030 subsequently visit this file, its cache is used to restore the
|
|
2031 highlighting.
|
|
2032
|
|
2033 To use this package, put in your `~/.emacs':
|
|
2034
|
|
2035 (add-hook 'font-lock-mode-hook 'turn-on-fast-lock)
|
|
2036
|
|
2037 To control the use of caches, see the documentation for `fast-lock-mode'.
|
|
2038
|
|
2039 ** You can tell pop-to-buffer to display certain buffers in the selected
|
|
2040 window rather than finding some other window to display them in.
|
|
2041 There are two variables you can use to specify these buffers.
|
|
2042
|
|
2043 same-window-buffer-names holds a list of buffer names; if a buffer's
|
|
2044 name appears in this list, pop-to-buffer puts it in the selected window.
|
|
2045
|
|
2046 same-window-regexps holds a list of regexps--if any one of them
|
|
2047 matches a buffer's name, then pop-to-buffer puts that buffer in the
|
|
2048 selected window.
|
|
2049
|
|
2050 The default values of these variables are not nil: they list various
|
|
2051 buffers that normally appear, when you as for them, in the selected
|
|
2052 window. These include shell buffers, mail buffers, telnet buffers,
|
|
2053 and others. By removing elements from these variables, you can ask
|
|
2054 Emacs to display those buffers in separate windows.
|
|
2055
|
|
2056 ** The special-display-buffer-names and special-display-regexps lists
|
|
2057 have been generalized. An element may now be a list. The car of the list
|
|
2058 is the buffer name or regular expression for matching buffer names.
|
|
2059
|
|
2060 The cdr of the list can be an alist specifying additional frame
|
|
2061 parameters for use in constructing the special display frame.
|
|
2062
|
|
2063 Alternatively, the cdr can have this form:
|
|
2064
|
|
2065 (FUNCTION ARGS...)
|
|
2066
|
|
2067 where FUNCTION is a symbol. Then the frame is constructed by calling
|
|
2068 FUNCTION; its first argument is the buffer, and its remaining
|
|
2069 arguments are ARGS.
|
|
2070
|
|
2071 ** If the environment variable REPLYTO is set, its value is the default
|
|
2072 for mail-default-reply-to.
|
|
2073
|
|
2074 ** When you send a message in Emacs, if you specify an Rmail file with
|
|
2075 the FCC: header field, Emacs converts the message to Rmail format
|
|
2076 before writing it. Thus, the file never contains anything but Rmail
|
|
2077 format messages.
|
|
2078
|
|
2079 ** The new variable mail-from-style controls whether the From: header
|
|
2080 should include the sender's full name, and if so, which format to use.
|
|
2081
|
|
2082 ** The new variable mail-personal-alias-file specifies the name of the
|
|
2083 user's personal aliases. This defaults to the file ~/.mailrc.
|
|
2084 mailabbrev.el used to have its own variable for this purpose
|
|
2085 (mail-abbrev-mailrc-file). That variable is no longer used.
|
|
2086
|
|
2087 ** In Buffer-Menu mode, the d and C-d commands (which mark buffers for
|
|
2088 deletion) now accept a prefix argument which serves as a repeat count.
|
|
2089
|
|
2090 ** Changes in BibTeX mode.
|
|
2091
|
|
2092 *** Reference keys can now be entered with TAB completion. All
|
|
2093 reference keys defined in that buffer and all labels that appear in
|
|
2094 crossreference entries are object to completion.
|
|
2095
|
|
2096 *** Braces are supported as field delimiters in addition to quotes.
|
|
2097 BibTeX entries may have brace-delimited and quote-delimited fields
|
|
2098 intermixed. The delimiters generated for new entries are specified by
|
|
2099 the variables bibtex-field-left-delimiter and
|
|
2100 bibtex-field-right-delimiter on a buffer-local basis. Those variables
|
|
2101 default to braces, since it is easier to put quote accented characters
|
|
2102 (as the german umlauts) into a brace-delimited entry.
|
|
2103
|
|
2104 *** The function bibtex-clean-entry can now be invoked with a prefix
|
|
2105 argument. In this case, a label is automatically generated from
|
|
2106 various fields in the record. If bibtex-clean-entry is invoked on a
|
|
2107 record without label, a label is also generated automatically.
|
|
2108 Various variables (all beginning with `bibtex-autokey-') control the
|
|
2109 creation of that key. The variable bibtex-autokey-edit-before-use
|
|
2110 determines, if the user is allowed to edit auto-generated reference
|
|
2111 keys before they are used.
|
|
2112
|
|
2113 *** A New function bibtex-complete-string completes strings with
|
|
2114 respect to the strings defined in this buffer and a set of predefined
|
|
2115 strings (initialized to the string macros defined in the standard
|
|
2116 BibTeX style files) in the same way in which ispell-complete-word
|
|
2117 works with respect to words in a dictionary. Candidates for
|
|
2118 bibtex-complete-string are initialized from variable
|
|
2119 bibtex-predefined-strings and by parsing the files found in
|
|
2120 bibtex-string-files for @String definitions.
|
|
2121
|
|
2122 *** Every reference/field pair has now attached a comment which
|
|
2123 appears in the echo area when this field is edited. These comments
|
|
2124 should provide useful hints for BibTeX usage, especially for BibTeX
|
|
2125 beginners. New variable bibtex-help-message determines if these help
|
|
2126 messages are to appear in the minibuffer when moving to a text entry.
|
|
2127
|
|
2128 *** Inscriptions of menu bar changed from "Entry Types" to
|
|
2129 "Entry-Types" and "Bibtex Edit" to "BibTeX-Edit".
|
|
2130
|
|
2131 *** The variable bibtex-include-OPTcrossref is now not longer a binary
|
|
2132 switch but a list of reference names which should contain a crossref
|
|
2133 field. E.g., you can tell bibtex-mode you want a crossref field for
|
|
2134 @InProceedings and @InBook entries but for no other.
|
|
2135
|
|
2136 *** The function validate-bibtex-buffer was completely rewritten to
|
|
2137 validate if a buffer is syntactically correct. find-bibtex-duplicates
|
|
2138 is no longer a function itself but was moved into
|
|
2139 validate-bibtex-buffer.
|
|
2140
|
|
2141 *** Cleaning a BibTeX entry tests, if necessary fields are there.
|
|
2142 E.g., if you tell bibtex-mode to include a crossref entry, some fields
|
|
2143 are optional which would be required without the crossref entry. If
|
|
2144 you now leave the crossref entry empty and do a bibtex-clean-entry
|
|
2145 with some now required fields left empty, version 2.0 of bibtex.el
|
|
2146 complains about the absence of these fields, whereas version 1.3
|
|
2147 didn't.
|
|
2148
|
|
2149 *** Default value for variables bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries and
|
|
2150 bibtex-sort-ignore-string-entries is now t.
|
|
2151
|
|
2152 *** All interactive functions are renamed to begin with `bibtex-'.
|
|
2153
|
|
2154 *** Keybindings with \C-c\C-e entry changed for unification. Often
|
|
2155 used reference types are now on control-modified keys, mediocre used
|
|
2156 types are on unmodified keys, seldom used types are on shift-modified
|
|
2157 keys and almost never used types on meta-modified keys.
|
|
2158
|
|
2159 * Configuration Changes in Emacs 19.29
|
|
2160
|
|
2161 ** Emacs now uses directory /usr/local/share for most of its installed
|
|
2162 files. This follows a GNU convention for directory usage.
|
|
2163
|
|
2164 ** The option --with-x11 is no longer supported.
|
|
2165 X11 is the only version of X that Emacs 19.29 supports;
|
|
2166 use --with-x if you need to request X support explicitly.
|
|
2167 (Normally this should not be necessary, since configure should
|
|
2168 automatically enable X support if X is installed on your machine.)
|
|
2169
|
|
2170 ** If you use the site-init.el file to set the variable
|
|
2171 mail-host-address to a string in the dumped Emacs, that string becomes
|
|
2172 the default host address for initializing user-mail-address.
|
|
2173 It is used instead of the value of (system-name).
|
|
2174
|
|
2175 * Lisp-Level Changes in Emacs 19.29
|
|
2176
|
|
2177 ** Basic Lisp
|
|
2178
|
|
2179 *** The range of integer values is now at least 2**28 on all machines.
|
|
2180 This means the maximum size of a buffer is at least 2**27-1,
|
|
2181 or 134,217,727.
|
|
2182
|
|
2183 *** You can now use Common Lisp syntax for the backquote and comma
|
|
2184 macros. Thus, you can now write `(x ,y z) instead of (` (x (, y) z)).
|
|
2185
|
|
2186 The old syntax is still accepted.
|
|
2187
|
|
2188 *** The new function rassoc is like assoc, except that it compares the
|
|
2189 key against the cdr of each alist element, where assoc would compare
|
|
2190 it against the car of each alist element.
|
|
2191
|
|
2192 *** The new function unintern deletes a symbol from an obarray. The
|
|
2193 first argument can be the symbol to delete, or a string giving its
|
|
2194 name. The second argument specifies the obarray (nil means the
|
|
2195 current default obarray).
|
|
2196
|
|
2197 If the specified symbol is not in the obarray, or if there's no symbol
|
|
2198 in the obarray matching the specified string, unintern does nothing
|
|
2199 and returns nil. If it does delete a symbol, it returns t.
|
|
2200
|
|
2201 *** You can specify an alternative read function for use by load and
|
|
2202 eval-region by binding the variable load-read-function to some other
|
|
2203 function. This function should accept one argument just like read.
|
|
2204 If load-read-function is nil, load and eval-region use ordinary read.
|
|
2205
|
|
2206 *** The new function `type-of' takes any object as argument, and
|
|
2207 returns a symbol identifying the type of that object--one of `symbol',
|
|
2208 `integer', `float', `string', `cons', `vector', `marker', `overlay',
|
|
2209 `window', `buffer', `subr', `compiled-function',
|
|
2210 `window-configuration', `process'.
|
|
2211
|
|
2212 *** When you use eval-after-load for a file that is already loaded, it
|
|
2213 executes the FORM right away. As before, if the file is not yet
|
|
2214 loaded, it arranges to execute FORM if and when the file is loaded
|
|
2215 later. The result is: if you have called eval-after-load for a file,
|
|
2216 and if that file has been loaded, then regardless of the order of
|
|
2217 these two events, the specified form has been evaluated.
|
|
2218
|
|
2219 *** The Lisp construct #@NUMBER now skips the next NUMBER characters,
|
|
2220 treating them as a comment.
|
|
2221
|
|
2222 You would not want to use this in a file you edit by hand, but it is
|
|
2223 useful for commenting out parts of machine-generated files.
|
|
2224
|
|
2225 *** Two new functions, `plist-get' and `plist-put',
|
|
2226 allow you to modify and retrieve values from lists formatted as property-lists.
|
|
2227 They work like `get' and `put', but operate on any list.
|
|
2228 `plist-put' returns the modified property-list; you must store it
|
|
2229 back where you got it.
|
|
2230
|
|
2231 *** The new function add-to-list is called with two elements,
|
|
2232 a variable that holds a list and a new element.
|
|
2233 It adds the element to the list unless it is already present.
|
|
2234 It compares elements using `equal'. Here is an example:
|
|
2235
|
|
2236 (setq foo '(a b)) => (a b)
|
|
2237
|
|
2238 (add-to-list 'foo 'c) => (c a b)
|
|
2239
|
|
2240 (add-to-list 'foo 'b) => (c a b)
|
|
2241
|
|
2242 foo => (c a b)
|
|
2243
|
|
2244 ** Changes in compilation.
|
|
2245
|
|
2246 Functions and variables loaded from a byte-compiled file
|
|
2247 now refer to the file for their doc strings.
|
|
2248
|
|
2249 This has a few consequences:
|
|
2250
|
|
2251 -- Loading the file is faster and uses less memory.
|
|
2252 -- Reference to doc strings is a little slower (the same speed
|
|
2253 as reference to the doc strings of primitive and preloaded functions).
|
|
2254 -- The compiled files will not work in old versions of Emacs.
|
|
2255 -- If you move the compiled file after loading it, Emacs can no longer
|
|
2256 find these doc strings.
|
|
2257 -- If you alter the compiled file (such as by compiling a new
|
|
2258 version), then further access to documentation strings will get
|
|
2259 nonsense results.
|
|
2260
|
|
2261 The byte compiler now optionally supports lazy loading of compiled
|
|
2262 functions' definitions. If you enable this feature when you compile,
|
|
2263 loading the compiled file does not actually bring the function
|
|
2264 definitions into core. Instead it creates references to the compiled
|
|
2265 file, and brings each function's definition into core the first time
|
|
2266 you call that function, or when you force it with the new function
|
|
2267 `fetch-bytecode'.
|
|
2268
|
|
2269 Using the lazy loading feature has a few consequences:
|
|
2270
|
|
2271 -- Loading the file is faster and uses less memory.
|
|
2272 -- Calling any function in the file for the first time is slower.
|
|
2273 -- If you move the compiled file after loading it, Emacs can no longer
|
|
2274 find the function definitions.
|
|
2275 -- If you alter the compiled file (such as by compiling a new
|
|
2276 version), then further access to functions not already loaded
|
|
2277 will get nonsense results.
|
|
2278
|
|
2279 To enable the lazy loading feature, set up a non-nil file local
|
|
2280 variable binding for the variable `byte-compile-dynamic' in the Lisp
|
|
2281 source file. For example, put this on the first line:
|
|
2282
|
|
2283 -*-byte-compile-dynamic: t;-*-
|
|
2284
|
|
2285 It's a good idea to use the lazy loading feature for a file that
|
|
2286 contains many functions, most of which are not actually used by a
|
|
2287 given user in a given session.
|
|
2288
|
|
2289 To turn off the basic feature of referring to the file for doc
|
|
2290 strings, set byte-compile-dynamic-docstrings to nil. You can do this
|
|
2291 globally, or for one source file by adding this to the first line:
|
|
2292
|
|
2293 -*-byte-compile-dynamic-docstrings: nil;-*-
|
|
2294
|
|
2295 ** Strings
|
|
2296
|
|
2297 *** Do not pass integer arguments to `concat' (or `vconcat' or
|
|
2298 `append'). We are phasing out the old unrecommended support for
|
|
2299 integers as arguments to these functions, in preparation for treating
|
|
2300 numbers as single characters in a future release. To concatenate
|
|
2301 numbers in string form, use `number-to-string' first, or rewrite the
|
|
2302 call to use `format' instead of `concat'.
|
|
2303
|
|
2304 *** The new function match-string returns the string of text matched at
|
|
2305 the given parenthesized expression by the last regexp search, or nil
|
|
2306 if there was no match. If the last match was by `string-match' on a
|
|
2307 string, the string must be given. Therefore, this function can be
|
|
2308 used in place of `buffer-substring' and `substring', when using
|
|
2309 `match-beginning' and `match-end' to find match positions.
|
|
2310
|
|
2311 (match-string N) or (match-string N STRING)
|
|
2312
|
|
2313 *** The function replace-match now accepts an optional fourth argument,
|
|
2314 STRING. Use this after performing string-match on STRING, to replace
|
|
2315 the portion of STRING that was matched. When used in this way,
|
|
2316 replace-match returns a newly created string which is the same as
|
|
2317 STRING except for the matched portion.
|
|
2318
|
|
2319 *** The new function buffer-substring-no-properties
|
|
2320 is like buffer-substring except that the string it returns
|
|
2321 has no text properties.
|
|
2322
|
|
2323 *** The function `equal' now considers two strings to be different
|
|
2324 if they don't have the same text properties.
|
|
2325
|
|
2326 ** Completion
|
|
2327
|
|
2328 *** all-completions now takes an optional fourth argument.
|
|
2329 If that argument is non-nil, completions that start with a space
|
|
2330 are ignored unless the initial string also starts with a space.
|
|
2331 (This used to happen unconditionally.)
|
|
2332
|
|
2333 ** Local Variables
|
|
2334
|
|
2335 *** Local hook variables.
|
|
2336
|
|
2337 There is now a clean way to give a hook variable a buffer-local value.
|
|
2338 Call the function `make-local-hook' to do this.
|
|
2339
|
|
2340 Once a hook variable is buffer-local, you can add hooks to it either
|
|
2341 globally or locally. run-hooks runs the local hook functions
|
|
2342 of the current buffer, then all the global hook functions.
|
|
2343
|
|
2344 The functions add-hook and remove-hook take an additional optional
|
|
2345 argument LOCAL which says whether to add (or remove) a local hook
|
|
2346 function or a global one.
|
|
2347
|
|
2348 Local hooks use t as an element of the (local) value of the hook
|
|
2349 variable as a flag meaning to use the global value also.
|
|
2350
|
|
2351 *** The new function local-variable-p tells you whether a particular
|
|
2352 variable is buffer-local in the current buffer or a specified buffer.
|
|
2353
|
|
2354 ** Editing Facilities
|
|
2355
|
|
2356 *** The function copy-region-as-kill no longer sets this-command;
|
|
2357 as a result, a following kill command will not normally append
|
|
2358 to the text saved by copy-region-as-kill.
|
|
2359
|
|
2360 *** Regular expression searching and matching no longer performs full
|
|
2361 Posix backtracking by default. They now stop with the first match found
|
|
2362 instead of looking for the longest match--just as they did in Emacs 18.
|
|
2363 The reason for this change is to get higher speed.
|
|
2364
|
|
2365 There are new functions you can use if you really want to search or
|
|
2366 match with Posix behavior: posix-search-forward,
|
|
2367 posix-search-backward, posix-looking-at, and posix-string-match. Call
|
|
2368 these just like re-search-forward, re-search-backward, looking-at, and
|
|
2369 string-match.
|
|
2370
|
|
2371 ** Files
|
|
2372
|
|
2373 *** The new variable `format-alist' defines file formats,
|
|
2374 which are ways of translating between the data in a file and things
|
|
2375 (text, text-properties, and possibly other information) in a buffer.
|
|
2376
|
|
2377 `format-alist' has one element for each format. Each element is a
|
|
2378 list like this:
|
|
2379 (NAME DOC-STRING REGEXP FROM-FN TO-FN MODIFY MODE-FN)
|
|
2380 containing the name of the format, a documentation string, a regular
|
|
2381 expression which is used to recognize files in that format, a decoding
|
|
2382 function, an encoding function, a flag that indicates whether the
|
|
2383 encoding function modifies the buffer, and a mode function.
|
|
2384
|
49600
|
2385 FROM-FN is called to decode files in that format; it gets two args, BEGIN
|
25853
|
2386 and END, and can make any modifications it likes, returning the new
|
|
2387 end position. It must make sure that the beginning of the file no
|
|
2388 longer matches REGEXP, or else it will get called again.
|
|
2389 TO-FN is called to encode a region into that format; it is also passed BEGIN
|
|
2390 and END, and either returns a list of annotations as in
|
|
2391 `write-region-annotate-functions', or modifies the region and returns
|
|
2392 the new end position.
|
|
2393 MODIFY, if non-nil, means the TO-FN modifies the region. If nil, TO-FN may
|
|
2394 not make any changes and should return a list of annotations.
|
|
2395
|
|
2396 `insert-file-contents' checks the beginning of the file that it is
|
|
2397 inserting to see if it matches one of the regexps. If so, then it
|
|
2398 calls the decoding function, and then looks for another match. When
|
|
2399 visiting a file, it also calls the mode function, and sets the
|
|
2400 variable `buffer-file-format' to the list of formats that the file
|
|
2401 used.
|
|
2402
|
|
2403 `write-region' calls the encoding functions for each format in
|
|
2404 `buffer-file-format' before it writes the file. To save a file in a
|
|
2405 different format, either set `buffer-file-format' to a different
|
|
2406 value, or call the new function `format-write-file'.
|
|
2407
|
|
2408 Since some encoding functions may be slow, you can request that
|
|
2409 auto-save use a format different from the buffer's default by setting
|
|
2410 the variable `auto-save-file-format' to the desired format. This will
|
|
2411 determine the format of all auto-save files.
|
|
2412
|
|
2413 *** The new function file-ownership-preserved-p tells you whether
|
|
2414 deleting a file and recreating it would keep the file's owner
|
|
2415 unchanged.
|
|
2416
|
|
2417 *** The new function file-regular-p returns t if a file
|
|
2418 is a "regular" file (not a directory, symlink, named pipe,
|
|
2419 terminal, or other I/O device).
|
|
2420
|
|
2421 *** The new function file-name-sans-extension discards the extension
|
|
2422 of a file name. You call it with a file name, and returns a string
|
|
2423 lacking the extension.
|
|
2424
|
|
2425 *** The variable path-separator is a string which says which
|
|
2426 character separates directories in a search path. It is ":"
|
|
2427 for Unix and GNU systems, ";" for MSDOG and Windows NT.
|
|
2428
|
|
2429 ** Commands and Key Sequences
|
|
2430
|
|
2431 *** Key sequences consisting of C-c followed by {, }, <, >, : or ; are
|
|
2432 now reserved for major modes. Sequences consisting of C-c followed by
|
|
2433 any other punctuation character are now meant for minor modes. We don't
|
|
2434 plan to convert all existing major modes to stop using those sequences,
|
|
2435 but we hope to keep them to a minimum.
|
|
2436
|
|
2437 *** When the post-command-hook or the pre-command-hook gets an error, the error
|
|
2438 is silently ignored. Emacs no longer sets the hook variable to nil when this
|
|
2439 happens. Meanwhile, the hook functions can now alter the hook variable in
|
|
2440 a normal fashion; there is no need to do anything special.
|
|
2441
|
|
2442 *** define-key, lookup-key, and various other functions for changing or
|
|
2443 looking up key bindings now let you write an event type with a list
|
|
2444 like (ctrl meta newline) or (meta ?d), as in XEmacs. (ctrl meta newline)
|
|
2445 is equivalent to the event type symbol C-M-newline, and (meta ?d)
|
|
2446 is equivalent to the character ?\M-d.
|
|
2447
|
|
2448 *** The function event-convert-list converts a list such as
|
|
2449 (meta ?d) into the corresponding event type (a symbol or integer).
|
|
2450
|
|
2451 *** In an interactive spec, `k' means to read a key sequence. In this
|
|
2452 key sequence, upper case characters and shifted function keys which
|
|
2453 have no bindings are converted to lower case if that makes them
|
|
2454 defined.
|
|
2455
|
|
2456 The new interactive code `K' reads a key sequence similarly, but does
|
|
2457 not convert the last event. `K' is useful for reading a key sequence
|
|
2458 to be given a binding.
|
|
2459
|
|
2460 *** The variable overriding-local-map now has no effect on the menu bar
|
|
2461 display unless overriding-local-map-menu-flag is non-nil. This is why
|
|
2462 incremental search no longer temporarily changes the menu bars.
|
|
2463
|
|
2464 Note that overriding-local-map does still affect the execution of key
|
|
2465 sequences entered using the menu bar. So if you use
|
|
2466 overriding-local-map, and a menu bar key sequence comes in, you should
|
|
2467 make sure to clear overriding-local-map before that key sequence gets
|
|
2468 looked up and executed. But this is what you'd normally do anyway:
|
|
2469 programs that use overriding-local-map normally exit and "put back"
|
|
2470 any event such as menu-bar that they do not handle specially.
|
|
2471
|
|
2472 *** The new variable `overriding-terminal-local-map' is like
|
|
2473 overriding-local-map, but is specific to a single terminal.
|
|
2474
|
|
2475 *** delete-frame events.
|
|
2476
|
|
2477 When you use the X window manager's "delete window" command, this now
|
|
2478 generates a delete-frame event. The standard definition of this event
|
|
2479 is a command that deletes the frame that received the event, and kills
|
|
2480 Emacs when the last visible or iconified frame is deleted. You can
|
|
2481 rebind the event to some other command if you wish.
|
|
2482
|
|
2483 *** Two new types of events, iconify-frame and make-frame-visible,
|
|
2484 indicate that the user iconified or deiconified a frame with the
|
|
2485 window manager. Since the window manager has already done the work,
|
|
2486 the default definition for both event types in Emacs is to do nothing.
|
|
2487
|
|
2488 ** Frames and X
|
|
2489
|
|
2490 *** Certain Lisp variables are now local to an X terminal (in other
|
|
2491 words, all the screens of a single X server). The value in effect, at
|
|
2492 any given time, is the one that belongs to the terminal of the
|
|
2493 selected frame. The terminal-local variables are
|
|
2494 default-minibuffer-frame, system-key-alist, defining-kbd-macro, and
|
|
2495 last-kbd-macro. There is no way for Lisp programs to create others.
|
|
2496
|
|
2497 The terminal-local variables cannot be buffer-local.
|
|
2498
|
|
2499 *** When you create an X frame, for the `top' and `left' frame
|
|
2500 parameters, you can now use values of the form (+ N) or (- N), where N
|
|
2501 is an integer. (+ N) means N pixels to the right of the left edge of
|
|
2502 the screen and (- N) means N pixels to the left of the right edge. In
|
|
2503 both cases, N may be zero (exactly at the edge) or negative (putting
|
|
2504 the window partly off the screen).
|
|
2505
|
|
2506 The function x-parse-geometry can return values of these forms
|
|
2507 for certain inputs.
|
|
2508
|
|
2509 *** The variable menu-bar-file-menu has been renamed to
|
|
2510 menu-bar-files-menu to match the actual item that appears in the menu.
|
|
2511 (All the other such variable names do match.)
|
|
2512
|
|
2513 *** The new function active-minibuffer-window returns the minibuffer window
|
|
2514 currently active, or nil if none is now active.
|
|
2515
|
|
2516 *** In the functions next-window, previous-window, next-frame,
|
|
2517 previous-frame, get-buffer-window, get-lru-window, get-largest-window
|
|
2518 and delete-windows-on, if you specify 0 for the last argument,
|
|
2519 it means to consider all visible and iconified frames.
|
|
2520
|
|
2521 *** When you set a frame's cursor type with modify-frame-parameters,
|
|
2522 you can now specify (bar . INTEGER) as the cursor type. This stands
|
|
2523 for a bar cursor of width INTEGER.
|
|
2524
|
|
2525 *** The new function facep returns t if its argument is a face name
|
|
2526 (or if it is a vector such as is used internally by the Lisp code
|
|
2527 to represent a face).
|
|
2528
|
|
2529 *** Each frame can now have a buffer-predicate function,
|
|
2530 which is the `buffer-predicate' frame parameter.
|
|
2531 When `other-buffer' looks for an alternative buffer, it considers
|
|
2532 only the buffers that fit the selected frame's buffer predicate (if it
|
|
2533 has one). This is useful for applications that make their own frames.
|
|
2534
|
|
2535 *** When you create an X frame, you can now specify the frame parameter
|
|
2536 `display'. This says which display to put the frame on. The value
|
|
2537 should be a display name--a string of the form
|
|
2538 "HOST:DPYNUMBER.SCREENNUMBER".
|
|
2539
|
|
2540 The functions x-server-... and x-display-... now take an optional
|
|
2541 argument which specifies the display to ask about. You can use either
|
|
2542 a display name string or a frame. A value of nil stands for the
|
|
2543 selected frame.
|
|
2544
|
|
2545 To close the connection to an X display, use the function
|
|
2546 x-close-connection. Specify which display with a display name. You
|
|
2547 cannot close the connection if Emacs still has frames open on that
|
|
2548 display.
|
|
2549
|
|
2550 x-display-list returns a list indicating which displays Emacs has
|
|
2551 connections to. Its elements are display names (strings).
|
|
2552
|
|
2553 *** The icon-type frame parameter may now be a file name.
|
|
2554 Then the contents of that file specify the icon bitmap to use
|
|
2555 for that frame.
|
|
2556
|
|
2557 *** The title of an Emacs frame, displayed by most window managers, is
|
|
2558 set from frame-title-format or icon-title-format. These have the same
|
|
2559 structure as mode-line-format.
|
|
2560
|
|
2561 *** x-display-grayscale-p is a new function that returns non-nil if
|
|
2562 your X server can display shades of gray. Currently it returns
|
|
2563 non-nil for color displays (because they can display shades of gray);
|
|
2564 we may change it in the next version to return nil for color displays.
|
|
2565
|
|
2566 *** The frame parameter scroll-bar-width specifies the width of the
|
|
2567 scrollbar in pixels.
|
|
2568
|
|
2569 ** Buffers
|
|
2570
|
|
2571 *** Creating a buffer with get-buffer-create does not obey
|
|
2572 default-major-mode. That variable is now handled in a separate
|
|
2573 function, set-buffer-major-mode. get-buffer-create and generate-new-buffer
|
|
2574 always leave the newly created buffer in Fundamental mode.
|
|
2575
|
|
2576 Creating a new buffer by visiting a file or with switch-to-buffer,
|
|
2577 pop-to-buffer, and similar functions does call set-buffer-major-mode
|
|
2578 to select the default major mode specified with default-major-mode.
|
|
2579
|
|
2580 *** You can now create an "indirect buffer". An indirect buffer shares
|
|
2581 its text, including text properties, with another buffer (the "base
|
|
2582 buffer"), but has its own major mode, local variables, overlays, and
|
|
2583 narrowing. An indirect buffer has a name of its own, distinct from
|
|
2584 those of the base buffer and all other buffers. An indirect buffer
|
|
2585 cannot itself be visiting a file (though its base buffer can be).
|
|
2586 The base buffer cannot itself be indirect.
|
|
2587
|
|
2588 Use (make-indirect-buffer BASE-BUFFER NAME) to make an indirect buffer
|
|
2589 named NAME whose base is BASE-BUFFER. If BASE-BUFFER is an indirect
|
|
2590 buffer, its base buffer is used as the base for the new buffer.
|
|
2591
|
|
2592 You can make an indirect buffer current, or switch to it in a window,
|
|
2593 just as you would a non-indirect buffer.
|
|
2594
|
|
2595 The function buffer-base-buffer, given an indirect buffer, returns its
|
|
2596 base buffer. It returns nil when given an ordinary buffer (not
|
|
2597 indirect).
|
|
2598
|
|
2599 The library `noutline' has versions of Outline mode and Outline minor
|
|
2600 mode which let you display different parts of the outline in different
|
|
2601 indirect buffers.
|
|
2602
|
|
2603 ** Subprocesses
|
|
2604
|
|
2605 *** The functions call-process and call-process-region now allow
|
|
2606 you to direct error message output from the subprocess into a
|
|
2607 separate destination, instead of mixing it with ordinary output.
|
|
2608 To do this, specify for the third argument, BUFFER, a list of the form
|
|
2609 (BUFFER-OR-NAME ERROR-DESTINATION)
|
|
2610 BUFFER-OR-NAME specifies where to put ordinary output; it should
|
|
2611 be a buffer or buffer name, or t, nil or 0. This is what would
|
|
2612 have been the BUFFER argument, ordinarily.
|
|
2613
|
|
2614 ERROR-DESTINATION specifies where to put the error output.
|
|
2615 nil means discard it, t means mix it with the ordinary output,
|
|
2616 and a string specifies a file name to write this output into.
|
|
2617
|
|
2618 You can't specify a buffer to put the error output in; that is not
|
|
2619 easy to implement directly. You can put the error output into a
|
|
2620 buffer by sending it to a temporary file and then inserting the file
|
|
2621 into a buffer.
|
|
2622
|
|
2623 *** Comint mode changes:
|
|
2624
|
|
2625 **** The variable comint-completion-addsuffix can also be a cons pair
|
|
2626 of the form (DIRSUFFIX . FILESUFFIX), where DIRSUFFIX and FILESUFFIX are
|
|
2627 strings added on unambiguous or exact completion of directories and file
|
|
2628 names, respectively.
|
|
2629
|
|
2630 ** Text properties
|
|
2631
|
|
2632 *** You can now specify which values of the `invisible' property
|
|
2633 make text invisible in a given buffer. The variable
|
|
2634 `buffer-invisibility-spec', which is always local in all buffers,
|
|
2635 controls this.
|
|
2636
|
|
2637 If its value is t, then any non-nil `invisible' property makes
|
|
2638 a character invisible.
|
|
2639
|
|
2640 If its value is a list, then a character is invisible if its
|
|
2641 `invisible' property value appears as a member of the list, or if it
|
|
2642 appears as the car of a member of the list.
|
|
2643
|
|
2644 When the `invisible' property value appears as the car of a member of
|
|
2645 the `buffer-invisibility-spec' list, then the cdr of that member has
|
|
2646 an effect. If it is non-nil, then an ellipsis appears in place of the
|
|
2647 character. (This happens only for the *last* invisible character in a
|
|
2648 series of consecutive invisible characters, and only at the end of a
|
|
2649 line.)
|
|
2650
|
|
2651 If a character's `invisible' property is a list, then Emacs checks each
|
|
2652 element of the list against `buffer-invisibility-spec'. If any element
|
|
2653 matches, the character is invisible.
|
|
2654
|
|
2655 *** The command `list-text-properties-at' shows what text properties
|
|
2656 are in effect at point.
|
|
2657
|
|
2658 *** Frame objects now exist in Emacs even on systems that don't support
|
|
2659 X Windows. You can create multiple frames, and switch between them
|
|
2660 using select-frame. The selected frame is actually displayed on your
|
|
2661 terminal; other frames are not displayed at all. The selected frame
|
|
2662 number appears in the mode line after `Emacs', except for frame 1.
|
|
2663
|
|
2664 Switching frames on ASCII terminals is therefore more or less
|
|
2665 equivalent to switching between different window configurations.
|
|
2666
|
|
2667 *** The new variable window-size-change-functions holds a list of
|
|
2668 functions to be called if window sizes change (or if windows are
|
|
2669 created or deleted). The functions are called once for each frame on
|
|
2670 which changes have occurred, with the frame as the sole argument.
|
|
2671 This takes place shortly before redisplay.
|
|
2672
|
|
2673 *** The modification hook functions of overlays now work differently.
|
|
2674 They are called both before and after each change. This makes it
|
|
2675 possible for the functions to determine exactly what the change was.
|
|
2676
|
|
2677 This change affects three overlay properties: the modification-hooks
|
|
2678 property, a list of functions called for deletions overlapping the
|
|
2679 overlay's range and for insertions inside it; the
|
|
2680 insert-in-front-hooks, a list of functions called for insertions at
|
|
2681 the beginning of the overlay; and the insert-behind-hooks, a list of
|
|
2682 functions called for insertions at the end of the overlay.
|
|
2683
|
|
2684 Each function is called both before and after each change that it
|
|
2685 applies to. Before the change, it is called with four arguments:
|
|
2686 (funcall FUNCTION OVERLAY nil START END)
|
|
2687 START and END are the same arguments that the before-change-functions
|
|
2688 receive.
|
|
2689
|
|
2690 After the change, each function is called with five arguments:
|
|
2691 (funcall FUNCTION OVERLAY t START END OLDSIZE)
|
|
2692 The last arguments, START and END and OLDSIZE,
|
|
2693 are the same arguments that the after-change-functions receive.
|
|
2694
|
|
2695 This means the function must accept either four or five arguments.
|
|
2696
|
|
2697 *** You can set defaults for text-properties with the new variable
|
|
2698 `default-text-properties'. Its value is a property list; the values
|
|
2699 specified there are used whenever a character (or its category) does
|
|
2700 not specify a value.
|
|
2701
|
|
2702 *** The `face' property of a character or an overlay can now be a list
|
|
2703 of face names. Formerly it had to be just one face name.
|
|
2704
|
|
2705 *** Changes in handling the `intangible' text property.
|
|
2706
|
|
2707 **** If inhibit-point-motion-hooks is non-nil, then `intangible' properties
|
|
2708 are ignored.
|
|
2709
|
|
2710 **** Moving to just before a stretch of intangible text
|
|
2711 is no longer special in any way. Point stays at that place.
|
|
2712
|
|
2713 **** When you move point backwards into the midst of intangible text,
|
|
2714 point moves back to the beginning of that text. (It used to move
|
|
2715 forward to the end of that text, which was not very useful.)
|
|
2716
|
|
2717 **** When moving across intangible text, Emacs stops wherever the
|
|
2718 property value changes. So if you have two stretches of intangible
|
|
2719 text, with different non-nil intangible properties, it is possible to
|
|
2720 place point between them.
|
|
2721
|
|
2722 ** Overlays
|
|
2723
|
|
2724 *** Overlay changes.
|
|
2725
|
|
2726 **** The new function previous-overlay-change returns the position of
|
|
2727 the previous overlay start or end, before a specified position. This
|
|
2728 is the backwards-moving counterpart of next-overlay-change.
|
|
2729
|
|
2730 **** overlay-get now supports category properties on an overlay
|
|
2731 the same way get-text-property supports them as text properties.
|
|
2732
|
|
2733 Specifically, if an overlay does not have the property PROP that you
|
|
2734 ask for, but it does have a `category' property which is a symbol,
|
|
2735 then that symbol's PROP property is used.
|
|
2736
|
|
2737 **** If an overlay has a non-nil `evaporate' property, it will be
|
|
2738 deleted if it ever becomes empty (i.e., when it spans no characters).
|
|
2739
|
|
2740 **** If an overlay has a `before-string' and/or `after-string' property,
|
|
2741 these strings are displayed at the overlay's endpoints.
|
|
2742
|
|
2743 ** Filling
|
|
2744
|
|
2745 *** The new variable fill-paragraph-function provides a way for major
|
|
2746 modes to override the filling of paragraphs. If this is non-nil,
|
|
2747 fill-paragraph calls it as a function, passing along its sole
|
|
2748 argument. If the function returns non-nil, fill-paragraph assumes it
|
|
2749 has done the job and simply passes on whatever value it returned.
|
|
2750
|
|
2751 The usual use of this feature is to fill comments in programming
|
|
2752 language modes.
|
|
2753
|
|
2754 *** Text filling and justification changes:
|
|
2755
|
|
2756 **** The new variable use-hard-newlines can be used to make a
|
|
2757 distinction between "hard" and "soft" newlines; the fill functions
|
|
2758 will then never remove a newline that was manually inserted. Hard
|
|
2759 newlines are marked with a non-nil `hard' text-property.
|
|
2760
|
|
2761 **** The fill-column and left-margin can now be modified by text-properties.
|
|
2762 Most lisp programs should use the new functions (current-fill-column) and
|
|
2763 (current-left-margin), which return the proper values to use for the
|
|
2764 current line.
|
|
2765
|
49600
|
2766 **** There are new functions for dealing with margins:
|
25853
|
2767
|
|
2768 ***** Set-left-margin and set-right-margin (set the value for a region
|
|
2769 and re-fill). These functions take three arguments: two to specify
|
|
2770 a region, and the desired margin value.
|
|
2771
|
|
2772 ***** Increase-left-margin, decrease-left-margin, increase-right-margin, and
|
|
2773 decrease-right-margin (change settings relative to current values, and
|
|
2774 re-fill).
|
|
2775
|
|
2776 ***** move-to-left-margin moves point there, optionally adding
|
|
2777 indentation or changing tabs to spaces in order to make that possible.
|
|
2778 beginning-of-line-text also moves past the fill-prefix and any
|
|
2779 indentation added to center or right-justify a line, to the beginning
|
|
2780 of the text that the user actually typed.
|
|
2781
|
|
2782 ***** delete-to-left-margin removes any left-margin indentation, but
|
|
2783 does not change the property.
|
|
2784
|
|
2785 **** The paragraph-movement functions look for the paragraph-start and
|
|
2786 paragraph-separate regexps at the current left margin, not at the
|
|
2787 beginning of the line. This means that those regexps should NOT use ^
|
|
2788 to anchor the search. However, for backwards compatibility, a ^ at
|
|
2789 the beginning of the regexp will be ignored, so most packages won't break.
|
|
2790
|
|
2791 **** justify-current-line is now capable of doing left, center, or
|
|
2792 right justification as well as full justification.
|
|
2793
|
|
2794 **** The fill functions can do any kind of justification based on the new
|
|
2795 `justification' text-property and `default-justification' variable,
|
|
2796 or arguments to the functions. They also have a new option which
|
|
2797 defeats the normal removal of extra whitespace.
|
|
2798
|
|
2799 **** The new function `current-justification' returns the kind of
|
|
2800 justification used for the current line. The new function
|
|
2801 `set-justification' can be used to change it, including re-justifying
|
|
2802 the text of the region according to the new value.
|
|
2803
|
|
2804 **** Filling and auto-fill are disabled if justification is `none'.
|
|
2805
|
49600
|
2806 **** The auto-fill-function is now called regardless of whether
|
25853
|
2807 the fill-column has been exceeded; the function can determine on its
|
|
2808 own whether filling (or justification) is necessary.
|
|
2809
|
|
2810 ** Processes
|
|
2811
|
|
2812 *** process-tty-name is a new function that returns the name of the
|
|
2813 terminal that the process itself reads and writes on (not the name of
|
|
2814 the pty that Emacs uses to talk with that terminal).
|
|
2815
|
|
2816 *** Errors in process filters and sentinels are now normally caught
|
|
2817 automatically, so that they don't abort other Lisp programs.
|
|
2818
|
|
2819 Setting debug-on-error non-nil turns off this feature; then errors in
|
|
2820 filters and sentinels are not caught. As a result, they can invoke
|
|
2821 the debugger, under the control of debug-on-error.
|
|
2822
|
|
2823 *** Emacs now preserves the match data around the execution of process
|
|
2824 filters and sentinels. You can use search and match functions freely
|
|
2825 in filters and sentinels without explicitly bothering to save the
|
|
2826 match data.
|
|
2827
|
|
2828 ** Display
|
|
2829
|
|
2830 *** The variable message-log-max controls how messages are logged in the
|
|
2831 "*Messages*" buffer. An integer value means to keep that many lines;
|
|
2832 t means to log with no limit; nil means disable message logging. Lisp
|
|
2833 code that calls `message' excessively (e.g. isearch.el) should probably
|
|
2834 bind this variable to nil.
|
|
2835
|
|
2836 *** Display tables now have a new element, at index 261, specifying the
|
|
2837 glyph to use for the separator between two side-by-side windows. By
|
|
2838 default, this is the vertical bar character `|'. Probably the only
|
|
2839 other useful character to store for this element is a space, to make
|
|
2840 less visual separation between two side-by-side windows displaying
|
|
2841 related information.
|
|
2842
|
|
2843 *** The new mode-line-format spec %c displays the current column number.
|
|
2844
|
|
2845 *** The new variable blink-matching-delay specifies how long to keep
|
|
2846 the cursor at the matching open-paren, after you insert a close-paren.
|
|
2847 This is useful mainly on systems which can wait for a fraction of a
|
|
2848 second--you can then specify fractional values such as 0.5.
|
|
2849
|
|
2850 *** Faster processing of buffers with long lines
|
|
2851
|
|
2852 The new variable cache-long-line-scans determines whether Emacs
|
|
2853 should use caches to handle long lines more quickly. This variable is
|
|
2854 buffer-local, in all buffers.
|
|
2855
|
|
2856 Normally, the line-motion functions work by scanning the buffer for
|
|
2857 newlines. Columnar operations (like `move-to-column' and
|
|
2858 `compute-motion') also work by scanning the buffer, summing character
|
|
2859 widths as they go. This works well for ordinary text, but if the
|
|
2860 buffer's lines are very long (say, more than 500 characters), these
|
|
2861 motion functions will take longer to execute. Emacs may also take
|
|
2862 longer to update the display.
|
|
2863
|
|
2864 If cache-long-line-scans is non-nil, these motion functions cache
|
|
2865 the results of their scans, and consult the cache to avoid rescanning
|
|
2866 regions of the buffer until the text is modified. The caches are most
|
|
2867 beneficial when they prevent the most searching---that is, when the
|
|
2868 buffer contains long lines and large regions of characters with the
|
|
2869 same, fixed screen width.
|
|
2870
|
|
2871 When cache-long-line-scans is non-nil, processing short lines will
|
|
2872 become slightly slower (because of the overhead of consulting the
|
|
2873 cache), and the caches will use memory roughly proportional to the
|
|
2874 number of newlines and characters whose screen width varies.
|
|
2875
|
|
2876 The caches require no explicit maintenance; their accuracy is
|
|
2877 maintained internally by the Emacs primitives. Enabling or disabling
|
|
2878 the cache should not affect the behavior of any of the motion functions;
|
|
2879 it should only affect their performance.
|
|
2880
|
|
2881 ** System Interface
|
|
2882
|
|
2883 *** The function user-login-name now accepts an optional
|
|
2884 argument uid. If the argument is non-nil, user-login-name
|
|
2885 returns the login name for that user id.
|
|
2886
|
|
2887 *** system-name, user-name, user-full-name and user-real-name are now
|
|
2888 variables as well as functions. The variables hold the same values
|
|
2889 that the functions would return. The new variable multiple-frames
|
|
2890 is non-nil if at least two non-minibuffer frames are visible. These
|
|
2891 variables may be useful in constructing the value of frame-title-format
|
|
2892 or icon-title-format.
|
|
2893
|
|
2894 *** Changes in time-conversion functions.
|
|
2895
|
|
2896 **** The new function format-time-string takes a format string and a
|
|
2897 time value. It converts the time to a string, according to the format
|
|
2898 specified. You can specify what kind of conversion to use with
|
|
2899 %-specifications.
|
|
2900
|
|
2901 **** The new function decode-time converts a time value into a list of
|
|
2902 specific items of information: the year, month, day of week, day of
|
|
2903 month, hour, minute and second. (A time value is a list of two or
|
|
2904 three integers.)
|
|
2905
|
|
2906 **** The new function encode-time converts specific items of time
|
|
2907 information--the second, minute, hour, day, month, year, and time
|
|
2908 zone--into a time value.
|
|
2909
|
|
2910 * Changes in Emacs 19.27
|
|
2911
|
|
2912 There are no changes; however, here is one bug fix made in 19.26 that users
|
|
2913 think should be documented here.
|
|
2914
|
|
2915 ** SPC and DEL in Info now handle menus consistently.
|
|
2916
|
|
2917 SPC and DEL scroll through an entire subtree an Info manual. Once you
|
|
2918 scroll through a node far enough to reach a menu, SPC begins moving
|
|
2919 into the subnodes of the menu, starting with the first one. When you
|
|
2920 reach the end of a subnode, SPC moves into the next subnode, and so
|
|
2921 on.
|
|
2922
|
|
2923 DEL more or less scrolls through the same text in reverse order.
|
|
2924
|
|
2925 * User Editing Changes in Emacs 19.26
|
|
2926
|
|
2927 ** In the X toolkit version, if you click on a menu bar item and
|
|
2928 release the button quickly outside the menu, the menu remains visible
|
|
2929 until you click or type something else. If you click on the menu, you
|
|
2930 select from the menu. Any other mouse click makes the menu disappear.
|
|
2931 Keyboard input gets rid of the menu and then is processed normally.
|
|
2932
|
|
2933 "Quickly" means within double-click-time milliseconds.
|
|
2934
|
|
2935 ** The C-x 5 commands to select a buffer in "another frame" now use an
|
|
2936 existing iconified frame, if any, deiconifying it. They also raise
|
|
2937 the frame.
|
|
2938
|
|
2939 ** Region highlighting on a black-and-white-only display now uses
|
|
2940 underlining. Inverse-video had the problem that you couldn't see
|
|
2941 the cursor.
|
|
2942
|
|
2943 ** You can now change the height of a window by pressing mouse-1 on
|
|
2944 the mode line and dragging it up and down.
|
|
2945
|
|
2946 ** If you set the environment variable LC_CTYPE to iso_8859_1 or
|
|
2947 iso-8859-1, Emacs automatically sets up for display and syntactic
|
|
2948 handling of the ISO Latin-1 character set.
|
|
2949
|
|
2950 This does not automatically load any of the packages for input of
|
|
2951 these characters, because it's not yet clear what is right to do.
|
|
2952 You must still explicitly load either iso-transl or iso-acc.
|
|
2953
|
|
2954 ** For a read-only buffer that is also modified, the mode line now displays
|
|
2955 %* instead of %%.
|
|
2956
|
|
2957 ** M-prior (scroll-other-window-down) is a new command that works like
|
|
2958 M-next (and C-M-v) but scrolls in the opposite direction.
|
|
2959
|
|
2960 M-home moves to the beginning of the buffer, in the other window.
|
|
2961 M-end moves to the end of the buffer, in the other window. These two
|
|
2962 commands, along with M-next and M-prior, form a series of commands for
|
|
2963 moving around in the other window.
|
|
2964
|
|
2965 ** In change logs, the mail address is now delimited with <...> instead
|
|
2966 of (...).
|
|
2967
|
|
2968 This makes it a little more convenient to extract the mail address for
|
|
2969 use in mailing a message.
|
|
2970
|
|
2971 ** In Shell mode and other comint modes, C-a has now returned to
|
|
2972 its ordinary meaning: move to the beginning of the line.
|
|
2973 Use C-c C-a to move to the end of the prompt.
|
|
2974
|
|
2975 ** If you set mail-signature to t to cause automatic insertion of
|
|
2976 your .signature file, you now get a -- before the signature.
|
|
2977
|
|
2978 ** Setting rmail-highlighted-headers to nil entirely turns off
|
|
2979 highlighting in Rmail. However, if your motivation for doing this is
|
|
2980 that the highlighted text doesn't look good on your display, it might
|
|
2981 be better to change the appearance of the `highlight' face. Once
|
|
2982 you've done that, you may find Rmail highlighting is useful.
|
|
2983
|
|
2984 ** In the calendar, mouse-2 is now used only for commands that apply to a date.
|
|
2985 If you click it when not on a date, it gives an immediate error.
|
|
2986
|
|
2987 Mouse-3 in the calendar now gives a menu of commands that do not apply
|
|
2988 to a particular date.
|
|
2989
|
|
2990 The D command displays diary entries from a specified diary file (not
|
|
2991 your standard diary file).
|
|
2992
|
|
2993 ** In the gnus-uu package, the binding for gnus-uu-threaded-decode-and-view
|
|
2994 is now C-c C-v C-d, not C-c C-v C-h. Thus, C-c C-v C-h is now available
|
|
2995 for asking for a list of the subcommands of C-c C-v.
|
|
2996
|
|
2997 ** You can now specify "who you are" for various Emacs packages by
|
|
2998 setting just one variable, user-mail-address. This currently applies
|
|
2999 to posting news with GNUS and to making change log entries. It may
|
|
3000 apply to additional Emacs features in the future.
|
|
3001
|
|
3002 * Lisp-Level Changes in Emacs 19.26:
|
|
3003
|
|
3004 ** The function insert-char now takes an optional third argument
|
|
3005 which, if non-nil, says the inserted characters should inherit sticky
|
|
3006 text properties from the surrounding text.
|
|
3007
|
|
3008 ** The `diary' library has been renamed to `diary-lib'. If you refer
|
|
3009 to this library in your Lisp code, you must update the references.
|
|
3010
|
|
3011 ** Sending text to a subprocess can read input from subprocesses if it
|
|
3012 has to wait because the destination subprocess's terminal input buffer
|
|
3013 is full.
|
|
3014
|
|
3015 It was already possible in unusual occasions for this operation to
|
|
3016 read subprocess input, but it did not happen very often. It is now
|
|
3017 more likely to happen.
|
|
3018
|
|
3019 ** last-nonmenu-event is now bound to t around filter functions and sentinels.
|
|
3020 This is to ensure that y-or-n-p and yes-or-no-p use the keyboard by default.
|
|
3021
|
|
3022 ** In mode lines, %+ now displays as % for unmodified read-only
|
|
3023 buffers. It is now the same as %* except in the case of a modified
|
|
3024 read-only buffer; in that case, %+ displays as *.
|
|
3025
|
|
3026 The old meaning of %+ is now available on %&.
|
|
3027 It displays * for a modified buffer and - for an unmodified buffer,
|
|
3028 regardless of read-only status.
|
|
3029
|
|
3030 ** You can now use `underline' in the color list of a face.
|
|
3031 It serves as a last resort, and says to underline the face
|
|
3032 (if previous color list elements can't be used).
|
|
3033
|
|
3034 ** The new function x-color-values returns the list of color values
|
|
3035 for a given color name (a string). The list contains three integers
|
|
3036 which give the amounts of red, green and blue in the color: (R G B).
|
|
3037
|
|
3038 ** In run-at-time, 0 as the repeat interval means "don't repeat".
|
|
3039
|
|
3040 ** The variable trim-versions-without-asking has been renamed to
|
|
3041 delete-old-versions.
|
|
3042
|
|
3043 ** The new function other-window-for-scrolling returns the choice of
|
|
3044 other window for C-M-v to scroll.
|
|
3045
|
|
3046 ** Note that the function fceiling was mistakenly documented as fceil before.
|
|
3047
|
|
3048 * Changes in cc-mode.el in Emacs 19.26:
|
|
3049
|
|
3050 ** A new syntactic symbol has been added: substatement-open. It
|
|
3051 defines the open brace of a substatement block. These used to get:
|
|
3052 ((block-open ...) (substatement . ...)).
|
|
3053
|
|
3054 Non-block substatement lines still get just ((substatement . ...))
|
|
3055
|
|
3056 Note that the custom indent function c-adaptive-block-open has been
|
|
3057 removed as obsolete.
|
|
3058
|
|
3059 ** You can now specify the `hanginess' of closing braces. See
|
|
3060 c-hanging-braces-alist.
|
|
3061
|
|
3062 ** Recognizes try and catch blocks in C++. They are given the
|
|
3063 substatement syntactic symbol.
|
|
3064
|
|
3065 ** should be generally more forgiving about non-GNU standard top-level
|
|
3066 construct definition styles (i.e. where the function/class/struct
|
|
3067 opening brace does not start in column zero).
|
|
3068
|
|
3069 If you hang the braces that open a top-level construct on the right
|
|
3070 edge, and you find you still need to define defun-open-prompt (Emacs
|
|
3071 19) please let me know. Note that there may still be performance
|
|
3072 issues related to non-column zero opening braces.
|
|
3073
|
|
3074 ** c-macro-expand is put on C-c C-e
|
|
3075
|
|
3076 ** New style: "Default". Resets indentation to those shipped with
|
|
3077 cc-mode.el.
|
|
3078
|
|
3079 ** internal defun c-indent-via-language-element has been renamed
|
|
3080 c-indent-line for compatibility with c-mode.el and awk-mode.
|
|
3081
|
|
3082 ** new buffer-local variable c-comment-start-regexp for (potential)
|
|
3083 flexibility in adding new modes based on cc-mode.el
|
|
3084
|
|
3085 * Changes in Emacs 19.25
|
|
3086
|
|
3087 The variable x-cross-pointer-shape (which didn't really exist) has
|
|
3088 been renamed to x-sensitive-text-pointer-shape, and now does exist.
|
|
3089
|
|
3090 * Changes in Emacs 19.24
|
|
3091
|
|
3092 Here is a list of new Lisp packages introduced since 19.22.
|
|
3093
|
|
3094 derived.el Define new major modes based on old ones.
|
|
3095 dired-x.el Extra Dired features.
|
|
3096 double.el New mode for conveniently inputting non-beyond chars.
|
|
3097 easymenu.el Create menus easily.
|
|
3098 ediff.el Snazzy diff interface.
|
|
3099 foldout.el A kind of outline mode designed for editing programs.
|
|
3100 gnus-uu.el UUdecode in GNUS buffers.
|
|
3101 ielm.el Interactively evaluate Lisp.
|
|
3102 This is a replacement for Lisp Interaction Mode.
|
|
3103 iso-cvt.el Conversion of beyond-ASCII characters between
|
|
3104 various different representations.
|
|
3105 jka-compr.el Automatic compression/decompression.
|
|
3106 mldrag.el Drag modeline to change heights of windows.
|
|
3107 mail-hist.el Provides history for headers of outgoing mail.
|
|
3108 rsz-mini.el Automatically resizing minibuffers.
|
|
3109 s-region.el Set region by holding shift.
|
|
3110 skeleton.el Templates for statement insertion.
|
|
3111 soundex.el Classifying words by how they sound.
|
|
3112 tempo.el Template insertion with hotspots.
|
|
3113
|
|
3114 * User Editing Changes in 19.23.
|
|
3115
|
|
3116 ** Emacs 19.23 uses Ispell version 3.
|
|
3117
|
|
3118 Previous Emacs 19 versions used Ispell version 4. That version had
|
|
3119 improvements in storing the dictionary compactly, but these are not
|
|
3120 very important nowadays. Meanwhile, in parallel to the work on Ispell
|
|
3121 4, many useful features were added to Ispell 3. Until a few months
|
|
3122 ago, the terms on Ispell 3 did not let us use it; but they have now
|
|
3123 been changed, so now we are using it. We are dropping Ispell 4.
|
|
3124
|
|
3125 ** Emacs 19.23 can run on MS-DOG. See the file MSDOS in the same
|
|
3126 directory as this file.
|
|
3127
|
|
3128 ** Emacs 19.23 can work with an X toolkit. You must specify toolkit
|
|
3129 operation when you configure Emacs: use the option
|
|
3130 --with-x-toolkit=yes. (This option uses code developed by Lucid;
|
|
3131 thanks to Frederic Pierresteguy for helping to adapt it.)
|
|
3132
|
|
3133 ** Emacs now has dialog boxes; yes/no and y/n questions automatically
|
|
3134 use them in commands invoked with the mouse. For more information,
|
|
3135 see below under "Lisp programming changes".
|
|
3136
|
|
3137 ** Menus now display the keyboard equivalents (if any) of the menu
|
|
3138 commands in parentheses after the menu item.
|
|
3139
|
|
3140 ** Kill commands, used in a read-only buffer, now move point across
|
|
3141 the text they would otherwise have killed. This way, you can use
|
|
3142 repeated kill commands to transfer text into the kill ring.
|
|
3143
|
|
3144 ** There is now a global mark ring in addition to the mark ring that is local
|
|
3145 to each buffer. The global mark ring stores positions in any buffer. Any
|
|
3146 time the mark is set and the current buffer is different from the last time
|
|
3147 the mark was set, the new mark is pushed on the global mark ring as well.
|
|
3148 The new command C-x C-SPC (pop-global-mark) pops the global mark ring and
|
|
3149 jumps to the last mark pushed, first switching to that buffer.
|
|
3150
|
|
3151 ** Query Replace is now available in the Edit menu.
|
|
3152
|
|
3153 ** ESC no longer simply exits a Query Replace. It now exits the Query
|
|
3154 Replace and remains pending. Thus, ESC A and M-A are now equivalent
|
|
3155 in Query Replace.
|
|
3156
|
|
3157 To simply exit a Query Replace, type RET or Period.
|
|
3158
|
|
3159 ** M-mouse-2 now puts point at the end of the yanked secondary selection.
|
|
3160
|
|
3161 ** Mouse-1 in the mode line now simply selects the window above that
|
|
3162 mode line. Mouse-2 in the mode line selects that window and expands
|
|
3163 it to fill the frame it is in.
|
|
3164
|
|
3165 ** You can now use mouse-2 in a Dired buffer or Tar mode buffer to find
|
|
3166 a file you click on, in a compilation buffer to go to a particular
|
|
3167 error message, and in a *Occur* buffer to go to a particular
|
|
3168 occurrence.
|
|
3169
|
|
3170 (It was already possible to do likewise in Info and in completion list
|
|
3171 buffers.)
|
|
3172
|
|
3173 What's more, the sensitive areas of the buffer now highlight when you
|
|
3174 move the mouse over them.
|
|
3175
|
|
3176 ** In a completion list buffer, the command RET now chooses the completion
|
|
3177 that is around or next to point.
|
|
3178
|
|
3179 ** If you specify the foreground color for the `mode-line' face, and
|
|
3180 mode-line-inverse-video is non-nil, then the default background color
|
|
3181 is the usual foreground color.
|
|
3182
|
|
3183 ** revert-buffer now preserves markers pointing within the unchanged
|
|
3184 text (if any) at the beginning and end of the file.
|
|
3185
|
|
3186 ** Version control checkin and checkout preserve all markers if the
|
|
3187 file does not contain any of the magic version header sequences that
|
|
3188 are updated automatically by RCS and SCCS. If such version headers
|
|
3189 are present, checkin and checkout preserve a marker unless it comes
|
|
3190 between two such sequences. (So it's a good idea to put all the
|
|
3191 header sequences close together.)
|
|
3192
|
|
3193 ** When a large deletion shuts off auto save temporarily in a buffer,
|
|
3194 you can now turn it on again by saving the buffer with C-x C-s (as was
|
|
3195 possible in Emacs 18). You can also turn it on again with M-1 M-x
|
|
3196 auto-save (as has been possible in Emacs 19).
|
|
3197
|
|
3198 ** C-x r d now runs the command delete-rectangle.
|
|
3199
|
|
3200 ** The new command imenu shows you a menu of interesting places in the
|
|
3201 current buffer and lets you select one; then it moves point there.
|
|
3202 The definition of interesting places depends on the major mode, but
|
|
3203 typically this includes function definitions and such. Normally,
|
|
3204 imenu displays the menu in a buffer; but if you bind it to a mouse
|
|
3205 event, it shows a mouse popup menu.
|
|
3206
|
|
3207 ** You can make certain chosen buffers, that normally appear in a
|
|
3208 separate window, appear in special frames of their own. To do this,
|
|
3209 set special-display-buffer-names to a list of buffer names; any buffer
|
|
3210 whose name is in that list automatically gets a special frame when it
|
|
3211 is to be displayed in another window.
|
|
3212
|
|
3213 A good value to try is ("*compilation*" "*grep*" "*TeX Shell*").
|
|
3214
|
|
3215 More generally, you can set special-display-regexps to a list of regular
|
|
3216 expressions; then each buffer whose name matches any of those regular
|
|
3217 expressions gets its own frame.
|
|
3218
|
|
3219 The variable special-display-frame-alist specifies the frame
|
|
3220 parameters for these frames. It has a default value, so you don't
|
|
3221 need to set it.
|
|
3222
|
|
3223 ** If you set sentence-end-double-space to nil, the fill commands
|
|
3224 expect just one space at the end of a sentence. (If you want the
|
|
3225 sentence commands to accept single spaces, you must modify the regexp
|
|
3226 sentence-end also.)
|
|
3227
|
|
3228 ** You can suppress the startup echo area message by adding text like
|
|
3229 this to your .emacs file:
|
|
3230
|
|
3231 (setq inhibit-startup-echo-area-message "YOUR-LOGIN-NAME")
|
|
3232
|
|
3233 Simply setting inhibit-startup-echo-area-message to your login name is
|
|
3234 not sufficient to inhibit the message; Emacs explicitly checks whether
|
|
3235 .emacs contains an expression as shown above. Your login name must
|
|
3236 appear in the expression as a Lisp string constant.
|
|
3237
|
|
3238 This way, you can easily inhibit the message for yourself if you wish,
|
|
3239 but thoughtless copying of your .emacs file will not inhibit the
|
|
3240 message for someone else.
|
|
3241
|
|
3242 ** Outline minor mode now uses C-c C-o as a prefix instead of just C-c.
|
|
3243
|
|
3244 ** In Outline mode, hide-subtree is now C-c C-d. (It was C-c C-h; but
|
|
3245 that is now a conventional way to ask for help about C-c commands.)
|
|
3246
|
|
3247 ** There are two additional commands in Outline mode.
|
|
3248 M-x hide-sublevels
|
|
3249 hides all headers except the topmost N levels.
|
|
3250 M-x hide-other
|
|
3251 hides everything about the body that point is in
|
|
3252 plus the headers leading up from there to the top of the tree.
|
|
3253
|
|
3254 ** In iso-transl and iso-insert, the sequences for entering A-ring and
|
|
3255 the AE ligature are now just A and E (plus the initial C-x 8 or Alt).
|
|
3256 You used to have to enter AA or AE, after the C-x 8 prefix of course.
|
|
3257 Likewise for lower case a-ring and ae.
|
|
3258
|
|
3259 ** iso-transl now defines convenient Alt keys as well as the C-x 8 prefix.
|
|
3260 Instead of prefixing a sequence with C-x 8, you can add Alt to the
|
|
3261 first character of the sequence. For example, Alt-" a is now a way
|
|
3262 to enter an a-umlaut.
|
|
3263
|
|
3264 ** CC mode is a greatly improved mode for C and C++.
|
|
3265 See the following page.
|
|
3266
|
|
3267 ** tcl mode is a new major mode. It provides features for
|
|
3268 editing, indenting and running tcl programs.
|
|
3269
|
|
3270 ** Compilation minor mode lets you parse error messages in any buffer,
|
|
3271 not just a normal compilation output buffer. Type M-x
|
|
3272 compilation-minor-mode to enable the minor mode; then C-c C-c jumps to
|
|
3273 the source location for the error at point, as in the `*compilation*'
|
|
3274 buffer. If you use compilation-minor-mode in an Rlogin buffer, it
|
|
3275 automatically accesses remote source files by ftp.
|
|
3276
|
|
3277 ** Comint and shell mode changes:
|
|
3278
|
|
3279 *** Comint modes (including Shell mode, GUD modes, etc.) now bind
|
|
3280 C-M-l to the command comint-show-output. This command scrolls the
|
|
3281 buffer to show the last batch of output from the subprogram.
|
|
3282
|
|
3283 *** Completion in Comint modes now truly operates on the string before
|
|
3284 point, rather than the word that point is within.
|
|
3285
|
|
3286 *** Comint mode file name completion ignores those files that end with a
|
|
3287 string in the new variable comint-completion-fignore. This variable's
|
|
3288 default value is nil.
|
|
3289
|
|
3290 *** Shell mode uses the variable shell-completion-fignore to set
|
|
3291 comint-completion-fignore. The default value is nil, but some
|
|
3292 people prefer ("~" "#" "%").
|
|
3293
|
49600
|
3294 *** The function `comint-watch-for-password-prompt' can be used to
|
25853
|
3295 suppress echoing when a subprocess asks for a password. To use it,
|
|
3296 do this:
|
|
3297
|
|
3298 (add-hook 'comint-output-filter-functions
|
|
3299 'comint-watch-for-password-prompt)
|
|
3300
|
|
3301 *** You can use M-x shell-strip-ctrl-m to strip ^M characters from
|
|
3302 process output.
|
|
3303
|
|
3304 *** In Shell mode, TAB now completes environment variables, if possible,
|
|
3305 and expands directory references.
|
|
3306
|
|
3307 *** You can use M-x comint-run to execute any program of your choice in
|
|
3308 a comint mode. Some programs such as shells, rlogin, and debuggers
|
|
3309 have their own specialized modes; this command is one way to use
|
|
3310 comint to run programs for which no such specialized mode exits. (You
|
|
3311 can also run a shell with M-x shell and run the program of your choice
|
|
3312 under the shell--but that gives you the specializations of Shell
|
|
3313 mode.)
|
|
3314
|
|
3315 ** When you run GUD (M-x gdb, M-x dbx, and so on), you can use TAB
|
|
3316 to do file name completion in the minibuffer.
|
|
3317
|
|
3318 The "Complete" menu includes an item for directory expansion.
|
|
3319
|
|
3320 ** GUD working with future versions of GDB will permit TAB for
|
|
3321 GDB-style symbol completion. This will work with GDB 4.13.
|
|
3322
|
|
3323 ** Rmail no longer gets new mail automatically when you visit an Rmail
|
|
3324 file specified by name--not even if it is your primary Rmail file. To
|
|
3325 get new mail, type `g'. This feature is an advantage because you now
|
|
3326 have a choice of whether to get new mail. (This change actually
|
|
3327 occurred in an earlier version, but wasn't listed here then, since it
|
|
3328 made the code do what the documentation already said.)
|
|
3329
|
|
3330 ** Rmail now highlights certain fields automatically, when you use X
|
|
3331 windows. The variable rmail-highlighted-headers controls which
|
|
3332 fields.
|
|
3333
|
|
3334 ** If you set rmail-summary-window-size to an integer, Rmail uses
|
|
3335 a window that many lines high for the summary buffer.
|
|
3336
|
|
3337 ** rmail-input-menu is a new command that visits an Rmail file letting
|
|
3338 you choose which file with a mouse menu. rmail-output-menu is
|
|
3339 similar; it outputs the current message, using a mouse menu to choose
|
|
3340 which Rmail file. These commands use the variables
|
|
3341 rmail-secondary-file-directory and rmail-secondary-file-regexp.
|
|
3342
|
|
3343 ** The mh-e package has been changed substantially.
|
|
3344 See the file ./MH-E-NEWS for details.
|
|
3345
|
|
3346 ** The calendar and diary have new features.
|
|
3347
|
|
3348 The menu bar for the calendar contains most of the calendar commands,
|
|
3349 arranged into logical categories.
|
|
3350
|
|
3351 Mouse-2 now performs specific-date-related commands when clicked on a
|
|
3352 date in the calendar window and common three-month-related commands
|
|
3353 when clicked elsewhere in the calendar window.
|
|
3354
|
|
3355 You can set up colored/shaded highlighting of holidays, diary entry
|
|
3356 dates, and today's date, by setting calendar-holiday-marker,
|
|
3357 diary-entry-marker, and calendar-today-marker to a face instead of a
|
|
3358 character. Using a special face is now the default if you are using a
|
|
3359 window system.
|
|
3360
|
|
3361 ** The appt package for displaying appointment reminders has new
|
|
3362 features.
|
|
3363
|
|
3364 *** The appt alarm window stays for the full duration of
|
|
3365 appt-display-duration. It no longer disappears when you start typing
|
|
3366 text.
|
|
3367
|
|
3368 *** You can change the way the appointment window is created/deleted by
|
|
3369 setting the variables appt-disp-window-function and
|
|
3370 appt-delete-window-function.
|
|
3371
|
|
3372 For instance, these variables can be set to functions that display
|
|
3373 appointments in pop-up frames, which are lowered or iconified after
|
|
3374 appt-display-duration seconds.
|
|
3375
|
|
3376 ** desktop.el can now save a list of buffer-local variables,
|
|
3377 and saves more global ones.
|
|
3378
|
|
3379 ** Pascal mode has been completely rewritten. It now features
|
|
3380 completing of function names, variables and type definitions around
|
|
3381 current point (like M-TAB does with lisp-symbols). There's also an
|
|
3382 outline mode (M-x pascal-outline) that hides the bodies of all
|
|
3383 functions you're not working with.
|
|
3384
|
|
3385 ** Edebug has a number of changes:
|
|
3386
|
|
3387 *** Edebug syntax error reporting is improved.
|
|
3388
|
|
3389 *** Top-level forms and defining forms other than defun and defmacro may
|
|
3390 now be debugged with Edebug.
|
|
3391
|
|
3392 *** Edebug specifications may now contain body, &define, name, arg or
|
|
3393 arglist, def-body, and def-form, to support definitions.
|
|
3394
|
|
3395 *** edebug-all-defuns is renamed to edebug-all-defs.
|
|
3396 def-edebug-form-spec is replaced by def-edebug-form whose arguments
|
|
3397 are unevaluated. The old names are still available for now.
|
|
3398
|
|
3399 *** Frequency counts and coverage data may be displayed for functions being
|
|
3400 debugged.
|
|
3401
|
|
3402 *** A global break condition is now checked at every stop point.
|
|
3403
|
|
3404 *** The previous condition at a breakpoint may now be edited.
|
|
3405
|
|
3406 *** A new "next" mode stops only after expression evaluation.
|
|
3407
|
|
3408 *** A new command, top-level-nonstop, does not even stop for unwind-protect,
|
|
3409 as top-level would.
|
|
3410
|
|
3411 * Changes in CC mode in Emacs 19.23.
|
|
3412
|
|
3413 `cc-mode' provides ANSI C, K&R C, and ARM C++ language editing. It
|
|
3414 represents the merge of c++-mode.el and c-mode.el. cc-mode provides a
|
|
3415 new, more flexible indentation engine so that indentation
|
|
3416 customization is more intuitive. There are two steps to calculating
|
|
3417 indentation: first, CC mode analyzes the line for syntactic content,
|
|
3418 then based on this content it applies user defined offsets and adds
|
|
3419 this offset to the indentation of some previous line.
|
|
3420
|
|
3421 The syntactic analysis determines if the line describes a `statement',
|
|
3422 `substatement', `class-open', `member-init-intro', etc. These are
|
|
3423 described in detail with C-h v c-offsets-alist. You can change the
|
|
3424 offsets interactively with C-c C-o (c-set-offsets), or
|
|
3425 programmatically in your c-mode-common-hook, which is run both by
|
|
3426 c-mode and c++-mode. You can also set up "styles" in the same way
|
|
3427 that you could with c-mode.el. The variable c-basic-offset controls
|
|
3428 the basic offset given to a level of indentation.
|
|
3429
|
|
3430 If, for example, you wanted to change this style:
|
|
3431
|
49600
|
3432 int foo (int i)
|
25853
|
3433 {
|
|
3434 switch (i) {
|
|
3435 case 1:
|
|
3436 printf ("its a foo\n");
|
|
3437 break;
|
|
3438 default:
|
|
3439 printf ("don't know what it is\n");
|
|
3440 break;
|
|
3441 }
|
|
3442 }
|
|
3443
|
|
3444 into this:
|
|
3445
|
49600
|
3446 int foo (int i)
|
25853
|
3447 {
|
|
3448 switch (i) {
|
|
3449 case 1:
|
|
3450 printf ("its a foo\n");
|
|
3451 break;
|
|
3452 default:
|
|
3453 printf ("don't know what it is\n");
|
|
3454 break;
|
|
3455 }
|
|
3456 }
|
|
3457
|
|
3458 you could add the following to your .emacs file:
|
|
3459
|
|
3460 (defun my-c-mode-common-hook ()
|
|
3461 (c-set-offset 'case-label 2)
|
|
3462 (c-set-offset 'statement-case-intro 2))
|
|
3463 (add-hook 'c-mode-common-hook 'my-c-mode-common-hook)
|
|
3464
|
|
3465 ** New variables:
|
|
3466
|
|
3467 c-offsets-alist contains an association list of syntactic symbols and
|
|
3468 their relative offsets. Do a "C-h v c-offsets-alist" to get a list of
|
|
3469 all syntactic symbols currently defined, and their meanings. You
|
|
3470 should not change this variable directly; use the supplied interface
|
|
3471 commands c-set-offset and c-set-style.
|
|
3472
|
|
3473 c-mode-common-hook is run by both c-mode and c++-mode during their
|
|
3474 common initializations. You should put any customizations that are
|
|
3475 the same for both C and C++ into this hook.
|
|
3476
|
|
3477 The variable c-strict-semantics-p is used mainly for debugging. When
|
|
3478 non-nil, CC mode signals an error if it returns a syntactic symbol
|
|
3479 that can't be found in c-offsets-alist.
|
|
3480
|
|
3481 If you want CC mode to echo the syntactic analysis for a particular
|
|
3482 line when you hit the TAB key, set c-echo-semantic-information-p to
|
|
3483 non-nil.
|
|
3484
|
|
3485 c-basic-offset controls the standard amount of offset for a level of
|
|
3486 indentation. You can set a syntactic symbol's offset to + or - as a
|
|
3487 short-hand for positive or negative c-basic-offset.
|
|
3488
|
|
3489 c-comment-only-line-offset lets you control indentation given to lines
|
|
3490 which contain only a comment, in the case of C++ line style comments,
|
|
3491 or the introduction to a C block comment. Comment-only lines at
|
|
3492 column zero can be anchored there independent of the indentation given
|
|
3493 to other comment-only lines.
|
|
3494
|
|
3495 c-block-comments-indent-p controls the style of C block comment
|
|
3496 re-indentation. If you put leading stars in front of comment
|
|
3497 continuation lines, you should set this variable to nil.
|
|
3498
|
|
3499 c-cleanup-list is a list describing certain C and C++ constructs to be
|
|
3500 "cleaned up" as they are typed, but only when the auto-newline feature
|
|
3501 is turned on. In C++, make sure this variable contains at least
|
|
3502 'scope-operator so that double colons will not be separated by a
|
|
3503 newline.
|
|
3504
|
|
3505 Colons (`:') and braces (`{` and `}') are special in C and C++. For
|
|
3506 certain constructs, you may like them to hang on the right edge of the
|
|
3507 code, or you may like them to start a new line of code. You can use
|
|
3508 the two variables c-hanging-braces-alist and c-hanging-colons-alist
|
|
3509 to control whether newlines are placed before and/or after colons and
|
|
3510 braces when certain C and C++ constructs are entered. For example,
|
|
3511 you can control whether the colon that introduces a C++ member
|
|
3512 initialization list hangs on the right edge, starts a new line, or has
|
|
3513 no newlines either before or after it.
|
|
3514
|
|
3515 c-special-indent-hook is run after a line is indented by CC mode. You
|
|
3516 can perform any custom indentations here.
|
|
3517
|
|
3518 c-delete-function is the function that is called when a single
|
|
3519 character is deleted with the c-electric-delete command (DEL).
|
|
3520
|
|
3521 c-electric-pound-behavior describes what happens when you enter the
|
|
3522 `#' that introduces a cpp macro.
|
|
3523
|
|
3524 If c-tab-always-indent is neither t nor nil, then TAB inserts a tab
|
|
3525 when within strings, comments, and cpp directives, but it reindents
|
|
3526 the line unconditionally.
|
|
3527
|
|
3528 c-inhibit-startup-warnings-p inhibits warnings about any old
|
|
3529 version of Emacs you might be running, which could be incompatible
|
|
3530 with cc-mode.
|
|
3531
|
|
3532 ** There are two new minor-mode features in CC mode: auto-newline and
|
|
3533 hungry-delete. Auto-newline inserts newlines automatically as you
|
|
3534 type certain constructs. Hungry-delete consumes all preceding
|
|
3535 whitespace (spaces, tabs, and newlines) when the delete key is hit.
|
|
3536 You can toggle auto-newline on and off on a per-buffer basis by
|
|
3537 hitting C-c C-a. You can toggle hungry-delete on and off by hitting
|
|
3538 C-c C-d. You can toggle them both on and off together with C-c C-t.
|
|
3539
|
|
3540 ** Slash (`/') and star (`*') are now both electric characters.
|
|
3541
|
|
3542 ** New commands:
|
|
3543
|
|
3544 The new C-c C-o (c-set-offset) command can be used to interactively change
|
|
3545 the offset for a particular syntactic symbol.
|
|
3546
|
|
3547 The new command C-c : (c-scope-operator) inserts the C++ scope operator in
|
|
3548 c++-mode only.
|
|
3549
|
|
3550 The new command C-c C-q (c-indent-defun) indents the entire enclosing
|
|
3551 top-level function or class.
|
|
3552
|
|
3553 The new command C-c C-s (c-show-semantic-information) echos the current
|
|
3554 syntactic analysis without re-indenting the current line.
|
|
3555
|
|
3556 The new commands M-x c-forward-into-nomenclature and M-x
|
|
3557 c-backward-into-nomenclature (currently otherwise unbound to a key
|
|
3558 sequence), make movement easier when using the C++ variable naming
|
|
3559 convention of VariableNamesWithoutUnderscoresButEachWordCapitalized.
|
|
3560
|
|
3561 ** Command from c-mode.el that have been renamed in cc-mode.el:
|
|
3562
|
|
3563 electric-c-brace => c-electric-brace
|
|
3564 electric-c-semi => c-electric-semi&comma
|
|
3565 electric-c-sharp-sign => c-electric-pound
|
|
3566 mark-c-function => c-mark-function
|
|
3567 electric-c-terminator => c-electric-colon
|
|
3568 indent-c-exp => c-indent-exp
|
|
3569 set-c-style => c-set-style
|
|
3570
|
|
3571 ** Variables from c-mode.el that are obsolete with cc-mode.el:
|
|
3572
|
|
3573 c-indent-level
|
|
3574 c-brace-imaginary-offset
|
|
3575 c-brace-offset
|
|
3576 c-argdecl-indent
|
|
3577 c-label-offset
|
|
3578 c-continued-statement-offset
|
|
3579 c-continued-brace-offset
|
|
3580
|
|
3581 * Lisp programming changes in Emacs 19.23.
|
|
3582
|
|
3583 ** To pop up a dialog box, call x-popup-dialog.
|
|
3584 It takes two arguments, POSITION and CONTENTS.
|
|
3585
|
|
3586 POSITION specifies which frame to place the dialog box over;
|
|
3587 the dialog box always goes on the center of the frame.
|
|
3588 POSITION may be a mouse event, a window, a frame,
|
|
3589 or t meaning use the frame that the mouse is in.
|
|
3590
|
|
3591 CONTENTS specifies the contents of the dialog box.
|
|
3592 It looks like a single pane of a popup menu:
|
|
3593 (TITLE ITEM1 ITEM2 ...), where each ITEM has the form (STRING . VALUE).
|
|
3594 The return value is VALUE from the chosen item.
|
|
3595
|
|
3596 An ITEM may also be just a string--that makes a nonselectable item.
|
|
3597 An ITEM may also be nil--that means to put all preceding items
|
|
3598 on the left of the dialog box and all following items on the right.
|
|
3599 (By default, approximately half appear on each side.)
|
|
3600
|
|
3601 If your Emacs is not using an X toolkit, then it cannot display a
|
|
3602 real dialog box; so instead it displays a pop-up menu in the center
|
|
3603 of the frame.
|
|
3604
|
|
3605 ** y-or-n-p, yes-or-no-p and map-y-or-n-p now use menus or dialog boxes
|
|
3606 to ask their question(s) if the command that is running was reached by
|
|
3607 a mouse event.
|
|
3608
|
|
3609 If you want to control which way these functions work, bind the
|
|
3610 variable last-nonmenu-event around the call. These functions use the
|
|
3611 keyboard if that variable holds a keyboard event (actually, any
|
|
3612 non-list); they use the mouse if that variable holds a mouse event
|
|
3613 (actually, any list).
|
|
3614
|
|
3615 ** The mouse-face property is now implemented, both in overlays and as
|
|
3616 a text property. It specifies a face to use when the mouse is in the
|
|
3617 range of text for which the property is specified.
|
|
3618
|
|
3619 ** When text has a non-nil `intangible' property, you cannot move point
|
|
3620 within it or right before it. If you try, point actually moves to the
|
|
3621 end of the intangible text. Note that this means that backward-char
|
|
3622 is a no-op when there is an intangible character to the left of point.
|
|
3623
|
|
3624 ** minibuffer-exit-hook is a new normal hook that is run when you
|
|
3625 exit the minibuffer.
|
|
3626
|
|
3627 ** The variable x-cross-pointer-shape specifies the cursor shape to use
|
|
3628 when the mouse is over text that has a mouse-face property.
|
|
3629
|
|
3630 ** The new variable interpreter-mode-alist specifies major modes to use
|
|
3631 for shell scripts that specify a command interpreter. Its elements
|
|
3632 look like (INTERPRETER . MODE); for example, ("perl" . perl-mode) is
|
|
3633 one element present by default. This feature applies only when the
|
|
3634 file name doesn't indicate which mode to use.
|
|
3635
|
|
3636 ** If you use a minibuffer-only frame, set the variable
|
|
3637 minibuffer-auto-raise to t, and entering the minibuffer will then
|
|
3638 raise the minibuffer frame.
|
|
3639
|
|
3640 ** If pop-up-frames is t, display-buffer now looks for an existing
|
|
3641 window in any visible frame, showing the specified buffer, and uses
|
|
3642 such a window in preference to making a new frame.
|
|
3643
|
|
3644 ** In the functions next-window, previous-window, next-frame,
|
|
3645 previous-frame, get-buffer-window, get-lru-window, get-largest-window
|
|
3646 and delete-windows-on, if you specify `visible' for the last argument,
|
|
3647 it means to consider all visible frames.
|
|
3648
|
|
3649 ** Mouse events now give the X and Y coordinates in pixels, rather than
|
|
3650 in characters. You can convert these values to characters by dividing by
|
|
3651 the values of (frame-char-width) and (frame-char-height).
|
|
3652
|
|
3653 ** The new functions mouse-pixel-position and set-mouse-pixel-position
|
|
3654 read and set the mouse position in units of pixels. The existing
|
|
3655 functions mouse-position and set-mouse-position continue to work with
|
|
3656 units of characters.
|
|
3657
|
|
3658 ** The new function compute-motion is useful for computing the width
|
|
3659 of certain text when it is displayed.
|
|
3660
|
|
3661 ** The function vertical-motion now takes an option second argument WINDOW
|
|
3662 which says which window to use for the display calculations.
|
|
3663
|
|
3664 vertical-motion always operates on the current buffer.
|
|
3665 It is ok to specify a window displaying some other buffer.
|
|
3666 Then vertical-motion uses the width, hscroll and display-table of
|
|
3667 the specified window, but still scans the current buffer.
|
|
3668
|
|
3669 ** An error no longer sets last-command to t; the value of last-command
|
|
3670 does reflect the previous command (the one that got an error).
|
|
3671
|
|
3672 If you do not want a particular command to be recognized as the
|
|
3673 previous command in the case where it got an error, you must code that
|
|
3674 command to prevent this. Set this-command to t at the beginning of
|
|
3675 the command, and set this-command back to its proper value at the end,
|
|
3676 like this:
|
|
3677
|
|
3678 (defun foo (args...)
|
|
3679 (interactive ...)
|
|
3680 (setq this-command t)
|
|
3681 ...do the work...
|
|
3682 (setq this-command 'foo))
|
|
3683
|
|
3684 or like this:
|
|
3685
|
|
3686 (defun foo (args...)
|
|
3687 (interactive ...)
|
|
3688 (let ((old-this-command this-command))
|
|
3689 (setq this-command t)
|
|
3690 ...do the work...
|
|
3691 (setq this-command old-this-command)))
|
|
3692
|
|
3693 The undo and yank commands do this.
|
|
3694
|
|
3695 ** If you specify an explicit title for a new frame when you create it,
|
|
3696 the title is used as the resource name when looking up X resources to
|
49600
|
3697 control the shape of that frame. If you don't specify the frame title,
|
25853
|
3698 the value of x-resource-name is used, as before.
|
|
3699
|
|
3700 ** The frame parameter user-position, if non-nil, says that the user
|
|
3701 has specified the frame position. Emacs reports this to the window
|
|
3702 manager, to tell it not to override the position that the user
|
|
3703 specified.
|
|
3704
|
|
3705 ** Major modes can now set change-major-mode-hook to arrange for state
|
|
3706 to be cleaned up when the user switches to a new major mode. The function
|
|
3707 kill-all-local-variables runs this hook. For best results, make the hook a
|
|
3708 buffer-local variable so that it will disappear after doing its job and will
|
|
3709 not interfere with the subsequent major mode.
|
|
3710
|
|
3711 ** The new variable overriding-local-map, if non-nil, specifies a keymap
|
|
3712 that overrides the current local map, all minor mode keymaps, and all
|
|
3713 text property keymaps. Incremental search uses this feature to override
|
|
3714 all other keymaps temporarily.
|
|
3715
|
|
3716 ** A key definition in a menu keymap can now have additional structure:
|
|
3717 in addition to (ITEMNAME [HELPSTRING] . COMMAND) which was allowed
|
|
3718 before, the form (ITEMNAME [HELPSTRING] (...) . COMMAND) is
|
|
3719 allowed. (HELPSTRING is optional, and is not currently used.)
|
|
3720
|
|
3721 Here (...) represents a sublist containing information about keyboard
|
|
3722 key sequences that run the same command COMMAND. Displaying the menu
|
|
3723 automatically creates and updates the sublist when appropriate; you
|
|
3724 need never set these up yourself.
|
|
3725
|
|
3726 lookup-key, key-binding, and similar functions return just COMMAND,
|
|
3727 not the whole binding.
|
|
3728
|
|
3729 To precompute this information for a given keymap, you can do
|
|
3730 (x-popup-menu nil KEYMAP).
|
|
3731
|
|
3732 ** When you specify coordinates for x-popup-menu as a list ((XOFFSET
|
|
3733 YOFFSET) WINDOW), the coordinates are now measured in pixels.
|
|
3734
|
|
3735 ** where-is-internal now takes just four arguments:
|
|
3736 DEFINITION KEYMAP FIRSTONLY NOINDIRECT.
|
|
3737 The single argument KEYMAP replaces two arguments KEYMAP and KEYMAP1.
|
|
3738
|
|
3739 If KEYMAP is non-nil, where-is-internal searches only KEYMAP and the
|
|
3740 global keymap.
|
|
3741
|
|
3742 If KEYMAP is nil, where-is-internal searches all the currently active
|
|
3743 keymaps, but finds the active keymaps as if overriding-local-map were
|
|
3744 nil.
|
|
3745
|
|
3746 If you pass a list of the form (keymap) as KEYMAP, where-is-internal
|
|
3747 searches only the global map. (This is not a special case--it follows
|
|
3748 from the specifications above.)
|
|
3749
|
|
3750 If you pass the value of overriding-local-map as KEYMAP, where-is-internal
|
|
3751 searches in exactly the same was as command execution does.
|
|
3752
|
|
3753 ** Use the macro define-derived-mode to define a new major mode that
|
|
3754 inherits the definition of another major mode. Here's how to define a
|
|
3755 command named hypertext-mode that inherits from the command text-mode:
|
|
3756
|
|
3757 (define-derived-mode hypertext-mode text-mode "Hypertext"
|
|
3758 "Major mode for hypertext.\n\n\\{hypertext-mode-map}"
|
|
3759 (setq case-fold-search nil))
|
|
3760
|
|
3761 (define-key hypertext-mode-map [down-mouse-3] 'do-hyper-link)
|
|
3762
|
|
3763 The new mode has its own keymap, which inherits from that of the
|
|
3764 original mode. It also has its own syntax and abbrev tables, which
|
|
3765 are initialized by copying those of the original mode. It also has
|
|
3766 its own mode hook. All are given names made by appending a suffix
|
|
3767 to the name of the new mode.
|
|
3768
|
|
3769 ** A syntax table can now inherit the data for some characters from
|
|
3770 standard-syntax-table, while specifying other characters itself.
|
|
3771 Syntax code 13 means "inherit this character from the standard syntax
|
|
3772 table." In modify-syntax-entry, the character `@' represents this code.
|
|
3773
|
|
3774 The function `make-syntax-table' now creates a syntax table which
|
|
3775 inherits all letters and control characters (0 to 31 and 128 to 255)
|
|
3776 from the standard syntax table, while copying the other characters
|
|
3777 from the standard syntax table. Most syntax tables in Emacs are set
|
|
3778 up this way.
|
|
3779
|
|
3780 This sort of inheritance is useful for people who set up character
|
|
3781 sets with additional alphabetic characters in the range 128 to 255.
|
|
3782 Just changing the standard syntax for these characters affects all
|
|
3783 major modes.
|
|
3784
|
|
3785 ** The new function transpose-regions swaps two regions of the buffer.
|
|
3786 It preserves the markers in those two regions, so that they stay with
|
|
3787 the surrounding text as it is swapped.
|
|
3788
|
|
3789 ** revert-buffer now runs before-revert-hook at the beginning and
|
|
3790 after-revert-hook at the end. These can be used by minor modes
|
|
3791 that need to clean up state variables.
|
|
3792
|
|
3793 ** The new function get-char-property is like get-text-property, but
|
|
3794 checks for overlays with properties as well as for text properties.
|
|
3795 It checks for overlays first, in order of descending priority, and
|
|
3796 text properties last.
|
|
3797
|
|
3798 get-char-property allows windows as the OBJECT argument, as well
|
|
3799 as buffers and strings. If you specify a window, then only overlays
|
|
3800 active on that window are considered.
|
|
3801
|
|
3802 ** Overlays can have the `invisible' property.
|
|
3803
|
49600
|
3804 ** The function insert-file-contents now takes an optional fifth
|
25853
|
3805 argument called REPLACE. If this is t, it means to replace the
|
|
3806 contents of the buffer (actually, just the accessible portion)
|
|
3807 with the contents of the file.
|
|
3808
|
|
3809 This is better than simply deleting and inserting the whole thing
|
|
3810 because (1) it preserves some marker positions and (2) it puts less
|
|
3811 data in the undo list.
|
|
3812
|
|
3813 ** The variable inhibit-first-line-modes-regexps specifies classes of
|
|
3814 file names for which -*- on the first line should not be looked for.
|
|
3815
|
|
3816 ** The variables before-change-functions and after-change-functions
|
|
3817 hold lists of functions to call before and after a change in the
|
|
3818 buffer's text. They work much like before-change-function and
|
|
3819 after-change-function, except that they hold a list of functions
|
|
3820 instead of just one.
|
|
3821
|
|
3822 These variables will eventually make before-change-function and
|
|
3823 after-change-function obsolete.
|
|
3824
|
|
3825 ** The variable kill-buffer-query-functions holds a list of functions
|
|
3826 to be called with no arguments when a buffer is about to be killed.
|
|
3827 (That buffer is the current buffer when the function is called.)
|
|
3828 If any of the functions returns nil, the buffer is not killed
|
|
3829 (and the remaining functions in the list are not called).
|
|
3830
|
|
3831 ** The variable kill-emacs-query-functions holds a list of functions
|
|
3832 to be called with no arguments when you ask to exit Emacs.
|
|
3833 If any of the functions returns nil, the exit is canceled
|
|
3834 (and the remaining functions in the list are not called).
|
|
3835
|
|
3836 ** The argument for buffer-disable-undo is now optional,
|
|
3837 like the argument for buffer-enable-undo.
|
|
3838
|
|
3839 ** The new variable system-configuration holds the canonical three-part
|
|
3840 GNU configuration name for which Emacs was built.
|
|
3841
|
|
3842 ** The function system-name now tries harder to return a fully qualified
|
|
3843 domain name.
|
|
3844
|
|
3845 ** The variable emacs-major-version holds the major version number
|
|
3846 of Emacs. (Currently 19.)
|
|
3847
|
|
3848 ** The variable emacs-minor-version holds the minor version number
|
|
3849 of Emacs. (Currently 23.)
|
|
3850
|
|
3851 ** The default value of comint-input-autoexpand is now nil.
|
|
3852 However, Shell mode sets it from the value of shell-input-autoexpand,
|
|
3853 whose default value is `history'.
|
|
3854
|
|
3855 ** The new function set-process-window-size specifies the terminal window
|
|
3856 size for a subprocess. On some systems it sends the subprocess a signal
|
|
3857 to let it know that the size has changed.
|
|
3858
|
|
3859 ** %P is a new way to display a percentage in the mode line. It
|
|
3860 displays the percentage of the buffer text that is above the *bottom*
|
|
3861 of the window (which includes the text visible, in the window as well
|
|
3862 as the text above the top). It displays `Top' as well as the
|
|
3863 percentage if the top of the buffer is visible on screen.
|
|
3864
|
|
3865 ** %+ in the mode line specs displays `*' if the buffer is modified,
|
|
3866 and otherwise `-'. It never displays `%', as `%*' would do; whether the
|
|
3867 buffer is read-only has no effect on %+.
|
|
3868
|
|
3869 ** The new functions ffloor, fceiling, fround and ftruncate take a
|
|
3870 floating point argument and return a floating point result whose value
|
|
3871 is a nearby integer. ffloor returns the nearest integer below; fceiling,
|
|
3872 the nearest integer above; ftruncate, the nearest integer in the
|
|
3873 direction towards zero; fround, the nearest integer.
|
|
3874
|
|
3875 ** Setting `print-escape-newlines' to a non-nil value now also makes
|
|
3876 formfeeds print as ``\f''.
|
|
3877
|
|
3878 ** auto-mode-alist now has a new feature. If an element has the form
|
|
3879 (REGEXP FUNCTION t), and REGEXP matches the file name, then after calling
|
|
3880 FUNCTION, Emacs deletes the part of the file name that matched REGEXP
|
|
3881 and then searches auto-mode-alist again for a new match.
|
|
3882
|
|
3883 This is useful for uncompression packages. An entry of this sort for
|
|
3884 .gz can uncompress the file and then put the uncompressed file in the
|
|
3885 proper mode according to the name sans .gz.
|
|
3886
|
|
3887 ** The new function emacs-pid returns the process ID number of Emacs.
|
|
3888
|
|
3889 ** user-login-name now consistently checks the LOGNAME environment
|
|
3890 variable before USER. user-original-login-name is obsolete, since it
|
|
3891 provides the same functionality. To ignore the environment variables,
|
|
3892 use user-real-login-name.
|
|
3893
|
|
3894 ** There is a more general way of handling the system-specific X
|
|
3895 keysyms. Set the variable system-key-alist to an alist containing
|
|
3896 elements of the form (CODE . SYMBOL), where CODE is the numeric keysym
|
|
3897 code minus the "vendor specific" bit, and symbol is the name for the
|
|
3898 function key.
|
|
3899
|
|
3900 ** You can use the variable command-line-functions to set up functions
|
|
3901 to process unrecognized command line arguments. The variable's value
|
|
3902 should be a list of functions of no arguments. The functions are
|
|
3903 called successively until one of them returns non-nil.
|
|
3904
|
|
3905 Each function should access the free variables argi (the current
|
|
3906 argument) and command-line-args-left (the remaining arguments). The
|
|
3907 function should return non-nil only if it recognizes and processes the
|
|
3908 argument in argi. If it does so, it may consume following arguments
|
|
3909 as well by removing them from command-line-args-left.
|
|
3910
|
|
3911 ** There's a new way for a magic file name handler to run a primitive
|
|
3912 and inhibit handling of the file name. Here is how to do it:
|
|
3913
|
|
3914 (let ((inhibit-file-name-handlers
|
49600
|
3915 (cons 'ange-ftp-file-handler
|
25853
|
3916 (and (eq inhibit-file-name-operation operation)
|
|
3917 inhibit-file-name-handlers)))
|
|
3918 (inhibit-file-name-operation operation))
|
|
3919 (apply this-operation args))
|
|
3920
|
|
3921 The function find-file-name-handler now takes two arguments. The
|
|
3922 second argument is OPERATION, the operation for which the handler is
|
|
3923 being sought.
|
|
3924
|
|
3925 People have suggested that the second argument should be optional, for
|
|
3926 backward compatibility. It would be nice if that were possible, but
|
|
3927 it is not. There is simply no way for find-file-name-handler to do
|
|
3928 the right thing without receiving the proper value for its second
|
|
3929 argument.
|
|
3930
|
|
3931 ** The variable completion-regexp-list affects the completion
|
|
3932 primitives try-completion and all-completions. They consider
|
|
3933 only the possible completions that match each regexp in the list.
|
|
3934
|
|
3935 ** Case conversion in the function replace-match has been changed.
|
|
3936
|
|
3937 The old behavior was this: if any word in the old text was
|
|
3938 capitalized, replace-match capitalized each word of the replacement
|
|
3939 text.
|
|
3940
|
|
3941 The new behavior is this: if the first word in the old text is capitalized,
|
|
3942 replace-match capitalizes the first word of the replacement text.
|
|
3943
|
|
3944 ** You can now specify a case table with CANON non-nil and EQV nil.
|
|
3945 Then the EQV part of the case table is deduced from CANON.
|
|
3946
|
|
3947 ** The new function minibuffer-prompt takes no arguments and returns
|
|
3948 the current minibuffer prompt string.
|
|
3949
|
|
3950 The new function minibuffer-prompt-width takes no arguments and
|
|
3951 returns the display width of the minibuffer prompt string.
|
|
3952
|
|
3953 ** The new function frame-first-window returns the window at the
|
|
3954 upper left corner of a given frame.
|
|
3955
|
|
3956 ** wholenump is a new alias for natnump.
|
|
3957
|
|
3958 ** The variable installation-directory, if non-@code{nil}, names a
|
|
3959 directory within which to look for the `lib-src' and `etc'
|
|
3960 subdirectories. This is non-nil when Emacs can't find those
|
|
3961 directories in their standard installed locations, but can find them
|
|
3962 near where the Emacs executable was found.
|
|
3963
|
|
3964 ** invocation-name and invocation-directory are now variables as well
|
|
3965 as functions. The variable values are the same values that the
|
|
3966 functions return: the Emacs program name sans directories, and the
|
|
3967 directory it was found in. (invocation-directory may be nil, if Emacs
|
|
3968 can't determine which directory it should be.)
|
|
3969
|
|
3970 ** Installation change regarding version number counting.
|
|
3971
|
|
3972 The version number of an Emacs executable contains three numbers.
|
|
3973 The first two describe the Emacs release and the third increments
|
|
3974 each time you build Emacs.
|
|
3975
|
|
3976 Now the file version.el contains only the first two version numbers.
|
|
3977 The third component is now determined on the basis of the names of the
|
|
3978 existing executable files. This means that version.el is not altered
|
|
3979 by building Emacs.
|
|
3980
|
|
3981 * Changes in 19.22.
|
|
3982
|
|
3983 ** The mouse click M-mouse-2 now inserts the current secondary
|
|
3984 selection (from Emacs or any other X client) where you click.
|
|
3985 It does not move point.
|
|
3986 This command is called mouse-yank-secondary.
|
|
3987
|
|
3988 mouse-kill-secondary no longer has a key binding by default.
|
|
3989 Clicking M-mouse-3 (mouse-secondary-save-then-kill) twice
|
|
3990 may be a convenient enough way of killing the secondary selection.
|
|
3991 Or perhaps there should be a keyboard binding for killing the
|
|
3992 secondary selection. Any suggestions?
|
|
3993
|
|
3994 ** New packages:
|
|
3995
|
|
3996 *** `icomplete' provides character-by-character information
|
|
3997 about what you could complete if you type TAB.
|
|
3998
|
|
3999 *** `avoid' moves the mouse away from point so that it doesn't hide
|
|
4000 your typing.
|
|
4001
|
|
4002 *** `shadowfile' helps you update files that are supposed to be stored
|
|
4003 identically in different places (perhaps on different machines).
|
|
4004
|
|
4005 ** C-h p now knows about four additional keywords: data, faces, mouse,
|
|
4006 and matching.
|
|
4007
|
|
4008 ** The key for starting an inferior Lisp process, in Lisp mode,
|
|
4009 is now C-c C-z instead of C-c C-l.
|
|
4010
|
|
4011 ** When the VC commands ask whether to save the buffer, if you say no,
|
|
4012 they signal an error. This is so that you won't operate on the wrong
|
|
4013 data.
|
|
4014
|
|
4015 ** ISO Accents mode now supports `"s' as a way of typing German sharp s.
|
|
4016
|
|
4017 ** By default, comint buffers (including Shell mode and debuggers)
|
|
4018 no longer try to scroll to keep the cursor on the bottom line.
|
|
4019 This feature was added in 19.21 but did not work smoothly enough.
|
|
4020
|
|
4021 ** Emacs now handles the window manager "delete window" operation.
|
|
4022
|
|
4023 ** Display of buffers with text properties is much faster now.
|
|
4024
|
|
4025 ** The feature previously announced whereby `insert' does not inherit
|
|
4026 text properties from surrounding text was not fully implemented
|
|
4027 before; but now it is. use `insert-and-inherit' if you wish to
|
|
4028 inherit sticky properties from the surrounding text.
|
|
4029
|
|
4030 ** The functions next-property-change, previous-property-change,
|
|
4031 next-single-property-change, and previous-single-property-change
|
|
4032 now take one additional optional argument LIMIT that is a position at
|
|
4033 which to stop scanning. If scan ends without finding the property
|
|
4034 change sought, these functions return the specified limit.
|
|
4035
|
|
4036 The value returned by previous-single-property-change and
|
|
4037 previous-property-change, when they do find a change, is now one
|
|
4038 greater than what it used to be. It is the position between the two
|
|
4039 characters whose properties differ, which is one greater than the
|
|
4040 position of the first character found (while scanning back) with
|
|
4041 different properties.
|
|
4042
|
|
4043 * User editing changes in version 19.21.
|
|
4044
|
|
4045 ** ISO Accents mode supports four additional characters:
|
|
4046 A-with-ring (entered as /A), AE ligature (entered as /E),
|
|
4047 and their lower-case equivalents.
|
|
4048
|
|
4049 * User editing changes in version 19.20.
|
|
4050 (See following page for Lisp programming changes.)
|
|
4051
|
|
4052 Note that some of these changes were made subsequent to the Emacs 19.20
|
|
4053 editions of the Emacs manual and Emacs Lisp manual; therefore, if you
|
|
4054 have those editions, do read this page.
|
|
4055
|
|
4056 ** Dragging with mouse button 1 now puts the selected region
|
|
4057 in the kill ring so you can paste it into other X applications.
|
|
4058
|
|
4059 ** Double and triple clicks with button 1 now behave as in xterm,
|
|
4060 selecting the word or line surrounding where you click. If you drag
|
|
4061 after the last click, you can select a range of words or lines.
|
|
4062
|
|
4063 ** You can use button 3 to extend a mouse-selected region, as in xterm.
|
|
4064 This works for regions selected either by dragging Mouse-1 or by
|
|
4065 multiple-clicking Mouse-1. Clicking Mouse-3 moves the end of the
|
|
4066 region that is (initially) nearer to where you click.
|
|
4067
|
|
4068 If the selection was first made by multiple-clicking Mouse-1, and thus
|
|
4069 consists of entire words or lines, Mouse-3 preserves that state.
|
|
4070
|
|
4071 As before, clicking Mouse-3 again in the same place kills the region
|
|
4072 thus selected.
|
|
4073
|
|
4074 ** The secondary selection commands, M-Mouse-1 and M-Mouse-3, have been
|
|
4075 likewise modified.
|
|
4076
|
|
4077 ** You can now search for strings and regexps using the Edit menu bar menu.
|
|
4078
|
|
4079 ** You can now access bookmarks using the Bookmark submenu in the File
|
|
4080 menu in the menu bar.
|
|
4081
|
|
4082 ** ISO Accents mode, a buffer-local minor mode, provides a convenient
|
|
4083 way to type certain non-ASCII characters. It makes the characters `,
|
|
4084 ', ", ^, ~ and / serve as modifiers for the following letter. ` and '
|
|
4085 add accents, " adds an umlaut or dieresis, ^ adds a circumflex, ~
|
|
4086 adds a tilde, and / adds a slash to the following letter.
|
|
4087
|
|
4088 If the following character is not a letter, or cannot be modified as
|
|
4089 requested, then both characters stand for themselves. If you
|
|
4090 duplicate the modifier accent character, that enters the corresponding
|
|
4091 ISO non-spacing accent character (thus, '' enters the ISO acute-accent
|
|
4092 character). To enter a modifier character itself, type it followed by
|
|
4093 a space.
|
|
4094
|
|
4095 This feature can be used whenever a key sequence is expected: for
|
|
4096 ordinary insertion, for searching, and for certain command arguments.
|
|
4097
|
|
4098 A few special combinations:
|
|
4099
|
|
4100 ~c => c with cedilla
|
|
4101 ~d => d with stroke
|
|
4102 ~< => left guillemot
|
|
4103 ~> => right guillemot
|
|
4104
|
|
4105 ** iso-transl.el is a new library that replaces iso-insert.el.
|
|
4106 It defines C-x 8 as an insertion prefix for the ISO characters
|
|
4107 between 128 and 255, much like iso-insert, except that iso-transl
|
|
4108 works even in searches and help commands--wherever a key sequence
|
|
4109 is expected.
|
|
4110
|
|
4111 To define case-conversion for these characters for ISO 8859/1,
|
|
4112 load the library iso-syntax. (This is not new.)
|
|
4113
|
|
4114 ** M-TAB in Text mode now runs the command ispell-complete-word
|
|
4115 which performs completion using the spelling dictionary.
|
|
4116
|
49600
|
4117 The spelling correction submenu now includes this command
|
25853
|
4118 and another command which completes a word fragment (that is,
|
|
4119 it doesn't assume that the text to be completed starts at the
|
|
4120 beginning of a word.
|
|
4121
|
|
4122 ** In incremental search, you can use M-y to yank the most recent kill
|
|
4123 into the search string.
|
|
4124
|
|
4125 ** The new function ispell-message checks the spelling of a message
|
|
4126 you are about to send or post. It ignores text cited from other
|
|
4127 messages.
|
|
4128
|
|
4129 To automatically check all your outgoing messages, include the
|
|
4130 following line in your .emacs file:
|
|
4131 (setq news-inews-hook (setq mail-send-hook 'ispell-message))
|
|
4132
|
|
4133 ** There is now a separate minibuffer history list for the names of
|
|
4134 extended commands. This history list is used by M-x when reading
|
|
4135 the command name. The motivation for this is to prevent command
|
|
4136 names from appearing in the history used for other minibuffer
|
|
4137 arguments.
|
|
4138
|
|
4139 Note that the history list for entire commands that use the minibuffer
|
|
4140 is a separate feature. That history list records a command with all
|
|
4141 its arguments, and you must use C-x ESC ESC to access it.
|
|
4142
|
|
4143 ** You can use the new command C-x v ~ VERSION RET to examine a
|
|
4144 specified version of a file that is maintained with version control.
|
|
4145
|
|
4146 ** In Indented Text mode, only blank lines now separate paragraphs.
|
|
4147 Indented lines continue the paragraph that is in progress. This makes
|
|
4148 the user option variable adaptive-fill-mode have its intended effect.
|
|
4149
|
|
4150 ** Local variable specifications in files for variables whose names end
|
|
4151 in `-hook' and `-function' are now controlled by the variable
|
|
4152 `enable-local-eval', just like the `eval' variable.
|
|
4153
|
|
4154 ** C-x r j (jump-to-register) when restoring a frame configuration now
|
|
4155 makes all unwanted frames (existing frames not mentioned in the
|
|
4156 configuration) invisible.
|
|
4157
|
|
4158 If you want to delete these unwanted frames, use a prefix argument for
|
|
4159 C-x r j.
|
|
4160
|
|
4161 ** You can customize the calendar to display weeks beginning on
|
|
4162 Monday: set the variable `calendar-week-start-day' to 1.
|
|
4163
|
|
4164 ** Rmail changes.
|
|
4165
|
|
4166 If you save messages to a file in Unix format while viewing a message
|
|
4167 with its whole header, this now copies to the file the entire header
|
|
4168 of each message copied.
|
|
4169
|
|
4170 ** Comint mode changes.
|
|
4171
|
|
4172 C-c C-e shows as much output as possible in the window.
|
|
4173 C-c RET copies an old input (the one at point)
|
|
4174 and places the copy after the latest prompt.
|
|
4175 C-c C-p and C-c C-n move through the buffer, stopping at places
|
|
4176 where the subshell prompted for input.
|
|
4177 C-c C-h lists the input history in a `*Help*' buffer.
|
|
4178
|
|
4179 There are new menu bar items for completion/input/output/signal commands.
|
|
4180
|
46989
|
4181 Input behavior is configurable. Variables control whether some windows
|
25853
|
4182 showing the buffer scroll to the bottom before insertion. These are
|
|
4183 `comint-scroll-to-bottom-on-input' and `before-change-function'. By default,
|
|
4184 insertion causes the selected window to scroll to the bottom before insertion
|
|
4185 occurs.
|
|
4186
|
|
4187 Subprocess output now keeps point at the end of the buffer in each
|
|
4188 window individually if point was already at the end of the buffer in
|
|
4189 that window.
|
|
4190
|
|
4191 If `comint-scroll-show-maximum-output' is non-nil (which is the
|
|
4192 default), then scrolling due to arrival of output tries to place the
|
|
4193 last line of text at the bottom line of the window, so as to show as
|
|
4194 much useful text as possible. (This mimics the scrolling behavior of
|
|
4195 many terminals.)
|
|
4196
|
|
4197 By setting `comint-scroll-to-bottom-on-output', you can opt for having
|
|
4198 point jump to the end of the buffer whenever output arrives--no matter
|
|
4199 where in the buffer point was before. If the value is `this', point
|
|
4200 jumps in the selected window. If the value is `all', point jumps in
|
|
4201 each window that shows the comint buffer. If the value is `other',
|
|
4202 point jumps in all nonselected windows that show the current buffer.
|
|
4203 The default value is nil, which means point does not jump to the end.
|
|
4204
|
|
4205 Input history insertion is configurable. A variable controls whether only the
|
|
4206 first instance of successive identical inputs is stored in the input history.
|
|
4207 This is `comint-input-ignoredups'.
|
|
4208
|
|
4209 Completion (bound to TAB) is now more general. Depending on context,
|
|
4210 completion now operates on the input history, on command names, or (as
|
|
4211 before) on filenames.
|
|
4212
|
|
4213 Filename completion is configurable. Variables control whether
|
|
4214 file/directory suffix characters are added (`comint-completion-addsuffix'),
|
|
4215 whether shortest completion is acceptable when no further unambiguous
|
|
4216 completion is possible (`comint-completion-recexact'), and the timing of
|
|
4217 completion candidate listing (`comint-completion-autolist').
|
|
4218
|
|
4219 Comint mode now provides history expansion. Insert input using `!'
|
|
4220 and `^', in the same syntax that typical shells use; then type TAB.
|
|
4221 This searches the comint input history for a matching element,
|
|
4222 performs substitution if necessary, and places the result in the
|
|
4223 comint buffer in place of the original input.
|
|
4224
|
|
4225 History references in the input may be expanded before insertion into
|
|
4226 the input ring, or on input to the interpreter (and therefore
|
|
4227 visibly). The variable `comint-input-autoexpand' specifies which.
|
|
4228
|
|
4229 You can make the SPC key perform history expansion by binding
|
|
4230 SPC to the command `comint-magic-space'.
|
|
4231
|
|
4232 The command `comint-dynamic-complete-variable' does variable name
|
|
4233 completion using the environment variables as set within Emacs. The
|
|
4234 variables controlling filename completion apply to variable name
|
|
4235 completion too. This command is normally available through the menu
|
|
4236 bar.
|
|
4237
|
|
4238 ** Shell mode
|
|
4239
|
|
4240 Paragraph motion and marking commands (default bindings M-{, M-}, M-h) operate
|
|
4241 on output groups (i.e., shell prompt plus associated shell output).
|
|
4242
|
|
4243 TAB now completes commands, as well as file names and expand history.
|
|
4244 Commands are searched for along the path that Emacs has on startup.
|
|
4245
|
|
4246 C-c C-f now moves forward a command (`shell-forward-command') and
|
|
4247 C-c C-b now moves backward a command (`shell-backward-command').
|
|
4248
|
|
4249 Command completion is configurable. The variables controlling
|
|
4250 filename completion in comint mode apply, together with a variable
|
|
4251 controlling whether to restrict possible completions to only files
|
|
4252 that are executable (`shell-command-execonly').
|
|
4253
|
|
4254 The input history is initialised from the file name given in the
|
|
4255 variable `shell-input-ring-file-name'--normally `.history' in your
|
|
4256 home directory.
|
|
4257
|
|
4258 Directory tracking is more robust. It can cope with command sequences
|
|
4259 and forked commands, and can detect the failure of directory changing
|
|
4260 commands in most circumstances. It's still not infallible, of course.
|
|
4261
|
46989
|
4262 You can now configure the behavior of `pushd'. Variables control
|
25853
|
4263 whether `pushd' behaves like `cd' if no argument is given
|
|
4264 (`shell-pushd-tohome'), pop rather than rotate with a numeric argument
|
|
4265 (`shell-pushd-dextract'), and only add directories to the directory
|
|
4266 stack if they are not already on it (`shell-pushd-dunique'). The
|
|
4267 configuration you choose should match the underlying shell, of course.
|
|
4268
|
|
4269 * Emacs Lisp programming changes in Emacs 19.20.
|
|
4270
|
|
4271 ** A new function `remove-hook' is now used to remove a hook that you might
|
|
4272 have added with `add-hook'.
|
|
4273
|
|
4274 ** There is now a Lisp pretty-printer in the library `pp'.
|
|
4275
|
|
4276 ** The partial Common Lisp support has been entirely reimplemented.
|
|
4277
|
|
4278 ** When you insert text using `insert', `insert-before-markers' or
|
|
4279 `insert-buffer-substring', text properties are no longer inherited
|
|
4280 from the surrounding text.
|
|
4281
|
|
4282 When you want to inherit text properties, use the new functions
|
|
4283 `insert-and-inherit' or `insert-before-markers-and-inherit'.
|
|
4284
|
|
4285 The self-inserting character command does do inheritance.
|
|
4286
|
|
4287 ** Frame creation hooks.
|
|
4288
|
|
4289 The function make-frame now runs the normal hooks
|
|
4290 before-make-frame-hook and after-make-frame-hook.
|
|
4291
|
|
4292 ** You can now use function-key-map to make a key an alias for other
|
|
4293 key sequences that can vary depending on circumstances. To do this,
|
|
4294 give the key a definition in function-key-map which is a function
|
|
4295 rather than a specific expansion key sequence.
|
|
4296
|
|
4297 If the function reads input itself, it can have the effect of altering
|
|
4298 the event that follows. For example, here's how to define C-c h to
|
|
4299 turn the character that follows into a hyper character:
|
|
4300
|
|
4301 (define-key function-key-map "\C-ch" 'hyperify)
|
|
4302
|
|
4303 (defun hyperify (prompt)
|
|
4304 (let ((e (read-event)))
|
|
4305 (vector (if (numberp e)
|
|
4306 (logior (lsh 1 20) e)
|
|
4307 (if (memq 'hyper (event-modifiers e))
|
|
4308 e
|
|
4309 (add-event-modifier "H-" e))))))
|
|
4310
|
|
4311 (defun add-event-modifier (string e)
|
|
4312 (let ((symbol (if (symbolp e) e (car e))))
|
|
4313 (setq symbol (intern (concat string (symbol-name symbol))))
|
|
4314 (if (symbolp e)
|
|
4315 symbol
|
|
4316 (cons symbol (cdr e)))))
|
|
4317
|
|
4318 The character translation function gets one argument, which is the
|
|
4319 prompt that was specified in read-key-sequence--or nil if the key
|
|
4320 sequence is being read by the editor command loop. In most cases
|
|
4321 you can just ignore the prompt value.
|
|
4322
|
|
4323 ** Changes for reading and writing text properties.
|
|
4324
|
|
4325 New low-level Lisp features make it possible to write Lisp programs to
|
|
4326 save text properties in files, and read text properties from files.
|
|
4327 You can program any file format you like.
|
|
4328
|
|
4329 The variable `write-region-annotation-functions' should contain a list
|
|
4330 of functions to be run by `write-region' to encode text properties in
|
|
4331 some fashion as annotations to the text that is written.
|
|
4332
|
|
4333 Each function in the list is called with two arguments: the start and
|
|
4334 end of the region to be written. These functions should not alter the
|
|
4335 contents of the buffer. Instead, they should return lists indicating
|
|
4336 annotations to write in the file in addition to the text in the
|
|
4337 buffer.
|
|
4338
|
|
4339 Each function should return a list of elements of the form (POSITION
|
|
4340 . STRING), where POSITION is an integer specifying the relative
|
|
4341 position in the text to be written, and STRING is the annotation to
|
|
4342 add there.
|
|
4343
|
|
4344 Each list returned by one of these functions must be already sorted in
|
|
4345 increasing order by POSITION. If there is more than one function,
|
|
4346 `write-region' merges the lists destructively into one sorted list.
|
|
4347
|
|
4348 When `write-region' actually writes the text from the buffer to the
|
|
4349 file, it intermixes the specified annotations at the corresponding
|
|
4350 positions. All this takes place without modifying the buffer.
|
|
4351
|
|
4352 The variable `after-insert-file-functions' should contain a list of
|
|
4353 functions to be run each time a file's contents have been inserted into
|
|
4354 a buffer. Each function receives one argument, the length of the
|
|
4355 inserted text; point indicates the start of that text. The function
|
|
4356 should make whatever changes it wants to make, then return the updated
|
|
4357 length of the inserted text, as it stands after those changes. The
|
|
4358 value returned by one function is used as the argument to the next.
|
|
4359 These functions should always return with point at the beginning of
|
|
4360 the inserted text.
|
|
4361
|
|
4362 The intended use of `after-insert-file-functions' is for converting
|
|
4363 some sort of textual annotations into actual text properties. But many
|
|
4364 other uses may be possible.
|
|
4365
|
|
4366 We now invite users to begin implementing Lisp programs to store and
|
|
4367 retrieve text properties in files, using these new primitive features,
|
|
4368 and thus to experiment with various data formats and find good ones.
|
|
4369
|
|
4370 We suggest not trying to handle arbitrary Lisp objects as property
|
|
4371 names or property values--because a program that general is probably
|
|
4372 difficult to write, and slow. Instead, choose a set of possible data
|
|
4373 types that are reasonably flexible, and not too hard to encode.
|
|
4374
|
|
4375 ** Comint completion.
|
|
4376
|
|
4377 Currently comint-dynamic-complete-command (and associated variable
|
|
4378 comint-after-partial-pathname-command) are set by default to complete a
|
|
4379 filename. Other comint-mode users should have their own functions to achieve
|
|
4380 this. For example, gud-mode could complete debugger commands. A completion
|
|
4381 function is provided solely for this reason (comint-dynamic-simple-complete).
|
|
4382
|
|
4383 Other comint-mode users should bind comint-dynamic-complete (shell-mode does
|
|
4384 already).
|
|
4385
|
|
4386 ** Comint history reference expansion
|
|
4387
|
|
4388 Currently comint-input-autoexpand is 'history, which means only expand
|
|
4389 history on insertion to comint-input-ring. For non-shell modes, this is
|
|
4390 a strange default, since non-shells will not understand history references.
|
|
4391 Perhaps it would be better for the variable to be 'input, which means expand
|
|
4392 on RET.
|
|
4393
|
|
4394 The value 'history might possibly be wrong even for shells, since the
|
|
4395 expansion will be done both by comint and the underlying shell (except sh, of
|
|
4396 course). It would be better for expansion to be done by one or the other,
|
|
4397 not both since they may (ahem) disagree. Since it is silly to put a literal
|
|
4398 history reference into comint-input-ring, perhaps it would be better for the
|
|
4399 variable to be 'input too.
|
|
4400
|
|
4401 The reason the variable is not 'input by default is that I was attempting to
|
|
4402 adhere to The Principle of Least Astonishment. I didn't want to shock users
|
|
4403 by having their input change in front of their eyes.
|
|
4404
|
|
4405 ** Argument delimiters and Comint mode.
|
|
4406
|
|
4407 Currently comint-delimiter-argument-list is '(), which means no strings are
|
|
4408 to be treated as delimiters and arguments. In shell-mode, this variable is
|
|
4409 set to shell-delimiter-argument-list, '("|" "&" "<" ">" "(" ")" ";"). Other
|
|
4410 comint-mode users should set this variable too. For example, a lisp-type
|
|
4411 mode might want to set this to '("." "(" ")") or some such.
|
|
4412
|
|
4413 ** Comint output hook.
|
|
4414
|
|
4415 There is now a hook, comint-output-filter-hook, that is run-hooks'ed by the
|
|
4416 output filter, comint-output-filter. This is useful for scrolling (see
|
|
4417 below), but also things like processing output for specific text, output
|
|
4418 highlighting, etc.
|
|
4419
|
|
4420 So that such output processing may be done efficiently, there is a new
|
|
4421 variable, comint-last-output-start, that records the position of the start of
|
|
4422 the lastest output inserted into the buffer (effectively the previous value
|
|
4423 of process-mark). Output processing functions should process the text
|
|
4424 between comint-last-output-start (or perhaps the beginning of the line that
|
|
4425 the position lies on) and process-mark.
|
|
4426
|
|
4427 ** Comint scrolling.
|
|
4428
|
|
4429 There is now automatic scrolling of process windows.
|
|
4430
|
|
4431 Currently comint-scroll-show-maximum-output is t, which means when scrolling
|
|
4432 output put process-mark at the bottom of the window. There is a good case
|
|
4433 for it to be t, since the user is likely to want to see as much output as
|
|
4434 possible. But, then again, there is a comint-show-maximum-output command.
|
|
4435
|
|
4436 ** Comint history retrieval.
|
|
4437
|
|
4438 The input following point is not deleted when moving around the input history
|
|
4439 (with M-p etc.). Emacs maintainers may not like this. However, I feel this
|
|
4440 is a useful feature. The simple remedy is to put end-of-line in before
|
|
4441 delete-region in comint-previous-matching-input.
|
|
4442
|
|
4443 The input history retrieval commands still wrap-around the input ring, unlike
|
|
4444 Emacs command history.
|
|
4445
|
|
4446 * Changes in version 19.19.
|
|
4447
|
|
4448 ** The new package bookmark.el records named bookmarks: positions that
|
|
4449 you can jump to. Bookmarks are saved automatically between Emacs
|
|
4450 sessions.
|
|
4451
|
|
4452 ** Another simpler package saveplace.el records your position in each
|
|
4453 file when you kill its buffer (or kill Emacs), and jumps to the same
|
|
4454 position when you visit the file again (even in another Emacs
|
|
4455 session). Use `toggle-save-place' to turn on place-saving in a given file;
|
|
4456 use (setq-default save-place t) to turn it on for all files.
|
|
4457
|
|
4458 ** In Outline mode, you can now customize how to compute the level of a
|
|
4459 heading line. Set `outline-level' to a function of no arguments which
|
|
4460 returns the level, assuming point is at the beginning of a heading
|
|
4461 line.
|
|
4462
|
|
4463 ** You can now specify the prefix key to use for Outline minor mode.
|
|
4464 (The default is C-c.) Set the variable outline-minor-mode-prefix to
|
|
4465 the key sequence you want to use (as a string or vector).
|
|
4466
|
|
4467 ** In Bibtex mode, C-c e has been changed to C-c C-b. This is because
|
|
4468 C-c followed by a letter is reserved for users.
|
|
4469
|
|
4470 ** The `mod' function is no longer an alias for `%', but is a separate function
|
|
4471 that yields a result with the same sign as the divisor. `floor' now takes an
|
|
4472 optional second argument, which divides the first argument before the floor is
|
|
4473 taken.
|
|
4474
|
|
4475 ** `%' no longer allows floating point arguments, since the results were often
|
|
4476 inconsistent with integer `%'.
|
|
4477
|
|
4478 * Changes in version 19.18.
|
|
4479
|
|
4480 ** Typing C-z in an iconified Emacs frame now deiconifies it.
|
|
4481
|
|
4482 ** hilit19 is a new library for automatic highlighting of parts of the
|
|
4483 text in the buffer, based on its meaning and context.
|
|
4484
|
|
4485 ** Killing no longer sends the killed text to the X clipboard.
|
|
4486 And large strings are not put in the cut buffer either.
|
|
4487 The variable x-cut-buffer-max specifies the maximum number of characters
|
|
4488 to put in the cut buffer.
|
|
4489
|
|
4490 ** The new command C-x 5 o (other-frame) selects different frames,
|
|
4491 successively, in cyclic order. It does for frames what C-x o
|
|
4492 does for windows.
|
|
4493
|
|
4494 ** The command M-ESC (eval-expression) has its own command history.
|
|
4495
|
|
4496 ** The commands M-! and M-| for running shell commands have their own
|
|
4497 command history.
|
|
4498
|
|
4499 ** If the directory containing the Emacs executable has a sibling named
|
|
4500 `lisp', that `lisp' directory is added to the end of `load-path'
|
|
4501 (provided you don't override the normal value with the EMACSLOADPATH
|
|
4502 environment variable). This feature may make it easier to move
|
|
4503 an installed Emacs from place to place.
|
|
4504
|
|
4505 ** M-x validate-tex-buffer now records the locations of mismatches
|
|
4506 found in the `*Occur*' buffer. You can go to that buffer and type C-c
|
|
4507 C-c to visit a particular mismatch.
|
|
4508
|
|
4509 ** There are new commands in Shell mode.
|
|
4510
|
|
4511 C-c C-n and C-c C-p move point to the next or previous shell input line.
|
|
4512
|
|
4513 C-c C-d is now another way to send an end-of-file to the subshell.
|
|
4514
|
|
4515 ** Changes to calendar/diary.
|
|
4516
|
|
4517 Time zone data is now determined automatically, including the
|
|
4518 start/stop days and times of daylight savings time. The code now
|
|
4519 works correctly almost anywhere in the world.
|
|
4520
|
|
4521 The format of the holiday specifications has changed and IS NO LONGER
|
|
4522 COMPATIBLE with the old (version 18) format. See the documentation of
|
|
4523 the variable calendar-holidays for details of the new, improved
|
|
4524 format.
|
|
4525
|
|
4526 The hook `diary-display-hook' has been split into two:
|
|
4527 diary-display-hook which should be used ONLY for the display and
|
|
4528 `diary-hook' which should be used for appointment notification. If
|
|
4529 diary-display-hook is nil (the default), simple-diary-display is
|
|
4530 used. This allows the diary hooks to be correctly set with add-hook.
|
|
4531
|
|
4532 The forms used for dates in diary entries and general display are no
|
|
4533 longer autoloaded, but set at load time; this means they will be set
|
|
4534 correctly based on values you assign to various variables.
|
|
4535
|
|
4536 ** The functions x-rebind-key and x-rebind-keys have been deleted,
|
|
4537 because you can accomplish the same job by binding keys to keyboard
|
|
4538 macros.
|
|
4539
|
|
4540 ** Emacs now distinguishes double and triple drag events and double and
|
|
4541 triple button-down events. These work analogously to double and
|
|
4542 triple click events.
|
|
4543
|
|
4544 Double drag events, if not defined, convert to ordinary click events.
|
|
4545 Double down events, if not defined, convert first to ordinary down
|
|
4546 events, which are then discarded if not defined. Triple events that
|
|
4547 are not defined convert to the corresponding double event; if that is
|
|
4548 also not defined, it may convert further.
|
|
4549
|
|
4550 ** The new function event-click-count returns the number of clicks,
|
|
4551 from an event which is a list. It is 1 for an ordinary click, drag,
|
|
4552 or button-down event, 2 for a double event, and 3 or more for a triple
|
|
4553 event.
|
|
4554
|
|
4555 ** The new function previous-frame is like next-frame, but moves
|
|
4556 around through the set of existing frames in the opposite order.
|
|
4557
|
|
4558 ** The post-command-hook now runs even after commands that get an error
|
|
4559 and return to top level. As a consequence of the same change, this
|
|
4560 hook also runs before Emacs reads the first command. That might sound
|
|
4561 paradoxical, as if this hook were the same as the pre-command-hook.
|
|
4562 Actually, they are not similar; the latter runs before *execution* of
|
|
4563 a command, but after it has been read.
|
|
4564
|
|
4565 ** You can turn off the text property hooks that run when point moves
|
|
4566 to certain places in the buffer, by binding inhibit-point-motion-hooks
|
|
4567 to a non-nil value.
|
|
4568
|
|
4569 ** Inserting a string with no text properties into the buffer normally
|
|
4570 inherits the properties of the preceding character. You can now
|
|
4571 control this inheritance by setting the front-sticky and
|
|
4572 rear-nonsticky properties of a character.
|
|
4573
|
|
4574 If you make a character's front-sticky property t, then insertion
|
|
4575 before the character inherits its properties. If you make the
|
|
4576 rear-nonsticky property t, then insertion after the character does not
|
|
4577 inherit its properties. You can regard characters as normally being
|
|
4578 rear-sticky and not front-sticky, and this is why insertion normally
|
|
4579 inherits from the previous character.
|
|
4580
|
|
4581 If neither side of an insertion is suitably sticky, then the inserted
|
|
4582 text gets no properties. If both sides are sticky, then the inserted
|
|
4583 text gets the properties of both sides, with the previous character's
|
|
4584 properties taking precedence when both sides have a property in
|
|
4585 common.
|
|
4586
|
|
4587 You can also specify stickiness for individual properties. To do so,
|
|
4588 use a list of property names as the value of the front-sticky property
|
|
4589 or the rear-nonsticky property. For example, if a character has a
|
|
4590 rear-nonsticky property whose value is (face read-only), then
|
|
4591 insertion after the character will not inherit its face property or
|
|
4592 read-only property (if any), but will inherit any other properties.
|
|
4593
|
|
4594 The merging of properties when both sides of the insertion are sticky
|
|
4595 takes place one property at a time. If the preceding character is
|
|
4596 rear-sticky for the property, and the property is non-nil, it
|
|
4597 dominates. Otherwise, the following character's property value is
|
|
4598 used if it is front-sticky for that property.
|
|
4599
|
|
4600 ** If you give a character a non-nil `invisible' text property, the
|
|
4601 character does not appear on the screen. This works much like
|
|
4602 selective display.
|
|
4603
|
|
4604 The details of this feature are likely to change in future Emacs
|
|
4605 versions.
|
|
4606
|
|
4607 ** In Info, when you go to a node, it runs the normal hook
|
|
4608 Info-selection-hook.
|
|
4609
|
|
4610 ** You can use the new function `invocation-directory' to get the name
|
|
4611 of the directory containing the Emacs executable that was run.
|
|
4612
|
|
4613 ** Entry to the minibuffer runs the normal hook minibuffer-setup-hook.
|
|
4614
|
|
4615 ** The new function minibuffer-window-active-p takes one argument, a
|
|
4616 minibuffer window, and returns t if the window is currently active.
|
|
4617
|
|
4618 * Changes in version 19.17.
|
|
4619
|
49600
|
4620 ** When Emacs displays a list of completions in a buffer,
|
25853
|
4621 you can select a completion by clicking mouse button 2
|
|
4622 on that completion.
|
|
4623
|
49600
|
4624 ** Use the command `list-faces-display' to display a list of
|
25853
|
4625 all the currently defined faces, showing what they look like.
|
|
4626
|
|
4627 ** Menu bar items from local maps now come after the usual items.
|
|
4628
|
|
4629 ** The Help menu bar item always comes last in the menu bar.
|
|
4630
|
|
4631 ** If you enable Font-Lock mode on a buffer containing a program
|
|
4632 (certain languages such as C and Lisp are supported), everything you
|
|
4633 type is automatically given a face property appropriate to its
|
|
4634 syntactic role. For example, there are faces for comments, string
|
|
4635 constants, names of functions being defined, and so on.
|
|
4636
|
|
4637 ** Dunnet, an adventure game, is now available.
|
|
4638
|
49600
|
4639 ** Several major modes now have their own menu bar items,
|
|
4640 including Dired, Rmail, and Sendmail. We would like to add
|
25853
|
4641 suitable menu bar items to other major modes.
|
|
4642
|
|
4643 ** The key binding C-x a C-h has been eliminated.
|
|
4644 This is because it got in the way of the general feature of typing
|
|
4645 C-h after a prefix character. If you want to run
|
|
4646 inverse-add-global-abbrev, you can use C-x a - or C-x a i g instead.
|
|
4647
|
|
4648 ** If you set the variable `rmail-mail-new-frame' to a non-nil value,
|
|
4649 all the Rmail commands to send mail make a new frame to do it in.
|
|
4650 When you send the message, or use the menu bar command not to send it,
|
|
4651 that frame is deleted.
|
|
4652
|
|
4653 ** In Rmail, the o and C-o commands are now almost interchangeable.
|
|
4654 Both commands check the format of the file you specify, and append
|
|
4655 the message to it in Rmail format if it is an Rmail file, and in
|
|
4656 inbox file format otherwise. C-o and o are different only when you
|
|
4657 specify a new file.
|
|
4658
|
|
4659 ** The function `copy-face' now takes an optional fourth argument
|
|
4660 NEW-FRAME. If you specify this, it copies the definition of face
|
|
4661 OLD-FACE on frame FRAME to face NEW-NAME on frame NEW-FRAME.
|
|
4662
|
|
4663 ** A local map can now cancel out one of the global map's menu items.
|
|
4664 Just define that subcommand of the menu item with `undefined'
|
|
4665 as the definition. For example, this cancels out the `Buffers' item
|
|
4666 for the current major mode:
|
|
4667
|
|
4668 (local-set-key [menu-bar buffer] 'undefined)
|
|
4669
|
|
4670 ** To put global items at the end of the menu bar, use the new variable
|
|
4671 `menu-bar-final-items'. It should be a list of symbols--event types
|
|
4672 bound in the menu bar. The menu bar items for these symbols are
|
|
4673 moved to the end.
|
|
4674
|
|
4675 ** The list returned by `buffer-local-variables' now contains cons-cell
|
|
4676 elements of the form (SYMBOL . VALUE) only for buffer-local variables
|
|
4677 that have values. For unbound buffer-local variables, the variable
|
|
4678 name (symbol) appears directly as an element of the list.
|
|
4679
|
|
4680 ** The `modification-hooks' property of a character no longer affects
|
|
4681 insertion; it runs only for deletion and modification of the character.
|
|
4682
|
|
4683 To detect insertion, use `insert-in-front-hooks' and
|
|
4684 `insert-behind-hooks' properties. The former runs when text is
|
|
4685 inserted immediately preceding the character that has the property;
|
|
4686 the latter runs when text is inserted immediately following the
|
|
4687 character.
|
|
4688
|
|
4689 ** Buffer modification now runs hooks belonging to overlays as well as
|
|
4690 hooks belonging to characters. If an overlay has a
|
|
4691 `modification-hooks' property, it applies to any change to text in the
|
|
4692 overlay, and any insertion within the overlay. If the overlay has a
|
|
4693 `insert-in-front-hooks' property, it runs for insertion at the
|
|
4694 beginning boundary of the overlay. If the overlay has an
|
|
4695 `insert-behind-hooks' property, it runs for insertion at the end
|
|
4696 boundary of the overlay.
|
|
4697
|
|
4698 The values of these properties should be lists of functions. Each
|
|
4699 function is called, receiving as arguments the overlay in question,
|
|
4700 followed by the bounds of the range being modified.
|
|
4701
|
|
4702 ** The new `-name NAME' option directs Emacs to search for its X
|
|
4703 resources using the name `NAME', and sets the title of the initial
|
|
4704 frame. This argument was added for consistency with other X clients.
|
|
4705
|
|
4706 ** The new `-xrm DATABASE' option tells Emacs to treat the string
|
|
4707 DATABASE as the text of an X resource database. Emacs searches
|
|
4708 DATABASE for resource values, in addition to the usual places. This
|
|
4709 argument was added for consistency with other X clients.
|
|
4710
|
|
4711 ** Emacs now searches for X resources in the files specified by the
|
|
4712 XFILESEARCHPATH, XUSERFILESEARCHPATH, and XAPPLRESDIR environment
|
|
4713 variables, emulating the functionality provided by programs written
|
|
4714 using Xt. Because of this change, Emacs will now notice system-wide
|
|
4715 application defaults files, as other X clients do.
|
|
4716
|
|
4717 XFILESEARCHPATH and XUSERFILESEARCHPATH should be a list of file names
|
|
4718 separated by colons; XAPPLRESDIR should be a list of directory names
|
|
4719 separated by colons.
|
|
4720
|
|
4721 Emacs searches for X resources
|
|
4722 + specified on the command line, with the `-xrm RESOURCESTRING'
|
|
4723 option,
|
|
4724 + then in the value of the XENVIRONMENT environment variable,
|
|
4725 - or if that is unset, in the file named ~/.Xdefaults-HOSTNAME if it exists
|
|
4726 (where HOSTNAME is the hostname of the machine Emacs is running on),
|
|
4727 + then in the screen-specific and server-wide resource properties
|
|
4728 provided by the server,
|
|
4729 - or if those properties are unset, in the file named ~/.Xdefaults
|
|
4730 if it exists,
|
|
4731 + then in the files listed in XUSERFILESEARCHPATH,
|
|
4732 - or in files named LANG/Emacs in directories listed in XAPPLRESDIR
|
|
4733 (where LANG is the value of the LANG environment variable), if
|
|
4734 the LANG environment variable is set,
|
|
4735 - or in files named Emacs in the directories listed in XAPPLRESDIR
|
|
4736 - or in ~/LANG/Emacs (if the LANG environment variable is set),
|
|
4737 - or in ~/Emacs,
|
|
4738 + then in the files listed in XFILESEARCHPATH.
|
|
4739
|
|
4740 The paths in the variables XFILESEARCHPATH, XUSERFILESEARCHPATH, and
|
|
4741 XAPPLRESDIR may contain %-escapes (like the control strings passed to
|
42674
|
4742 the Emacs lisp `format' function or C printf function), which Emacs expands.
|
25853
|
4743
|
|
4744 %N is replaced by the string "Emacs" wherever it occurs.
|
|
4745 %T is replaced by "app-defaults" wherever it occurs.
|
|
4746 %S is replaced by the empty string wherever it occurs.
|
|
4747 %L and %l are replaced by the value of the LANG environment variable; if LANG
|
|
4748 is not set, Emacs does not use that directory or file name at all.
|
|
4749 %C is replaced by the value of the resource named "customization"
|
|
4750 (class "Customization"), as retrieved from the server's resource
|
|
4751 properties or the user's ~/.Xdefaults file, or the empty string if
|
|
4752 that resource doesn't exist.
|
|
4753
|
|
4754 So, for example,
|
|
4755 if XFILESEARCHPATH is set to the value
|
|
4756 "/usr/lib/X11/%L/%T/%N%C:/usr/lib/X11/%T/%N%C:/usr/lib/X11/%T/%N",
|
|
4757 and the LANG environment variable is set to
|
|
4758 "english",
|
|
4759 and the customization resource is the string
|
|
4760 "-color",
|
|
4761 then, in the last step of the process described above, Emacs checks
|
|
4762 for resources in the first of the following files that is present and
|
|
4763 readable:
|
|
4764 /usr/lib/X11/english/app-defaults/Emacs-color
|
|
4765 /usr/lib/X11/app-defaults/Emacs-color
|
|
4766 /usr/lib/X11/app-defaults/Emacs
|
|
4767 If the LANG environment variable is not set, then Emacs never uses the
|
|
4768 first element of the path, "/usr/lib/X11/%L/%T/%N%C", because it
|
|
4769 contains the %L escape.
|
|
4770
|
|
4771 If XFILESEARCHPATH is unset, Emacs uses the default value
|
|
4772 "/usr/lib/X11/%L/app-defaults/Emacs%C:\
|
|
4773 /usr/lib/X11/app-defaults/Emacs%C:\
|
|
4774 /usr/lib/X11/%L/app-defaults/Emacs:\
|
|
4775 /usr/lib/X11/app-defaults/Emacs"
|
|
4776
|
|
4777 This feature was added for consistency with other X applications.
|
|
4778
|
|
4779 ** The new function `text-property-any' scans the region of text from
|
|
4780 START to END to see if any character's property PROP is `eq' to
|
|
4781 VALUE. If so, it returns the position of the first such character.
|
|
4782 Otherwise, it returns nil.
|
|
4783
|
|
4784 The optional fifth argument, OBJECT, specifies the string or buffer to
|
|
4785 be examined.
|
|
4786
|
|
4787 ** The new function `text-property-not-all' scans the region of text from
|
|
4788 START to END to see if any character's property PROP is not `eq' to
|
|
4789 VALUE. If so, it returns the position of the first such character.
|
|
4790 Otherwise, it returns nil.
|
|
4791
|
|
4792 The optional fifth argument, OBJECT, specifies the string or buffer to
|
|
4793 be examined.
|
|
4794
|
|
4795 ** The function `delete-windows-on' now takes an optional second
|
|
4796 argument FRAME, which specifies which frames it should affect.
|
|
4797 + If FRAME is nil or omitted, then `delete-windows-on' deletes windows
|
|
4798 showing BUFFER (its first argument) on all frames.
|
|
4799 + If FRAME is t, then `delete-windows-on' only deletes windows on the
|
|
4800 selected frame; other frames are unaffected.
|
|
4801 + If FRAME is a frame, then `delete-windows-on' only deletes windows on
|
|
4802 the given frame; other frames are unaffected.
|
|
4803
|
|
4804
|
|
4805 * Changes in version 19.16.
|
|
4806
|
|
4807 ** When dragging the mouse to select a region, Emacs now highlights the
|
|
4808 region as you drag (if Transient Mark mode is enabled). If you
|
|
4809 continue the drag beyond the boundaries of the window, Emacs scrolls
|
|
4810 the window at a steady rate until you either move the mouse back into
|
|
4811 the window or release the button.
|
|
4812
|
|
4813 ** RET now exits `query-replace' and `query-replace-regexp'; this makes it
|
|
4814 more consistent with the incremental search facility, which uses RET
|
|
4815 to end the search.
|
|
4816
|
|
4817 ** In C mode, C-c C-u now runs c-up-conditional.
|
|
4818 C-c C-n and C-c C-p now run new commands that move forward
|
|
4819 and back over balanced sets of C conditionals (c-forward-conditional
|
|
4820 and c-backward-conditional).
|
|
4821
|
|
4822 ** The Edit entry in the menu bar has a new alternative:
|
|
4823 "Choose Next Paste". It gives you a menu showing the various
|
49600
|
4824 strings in the kill ring; click on one to select it as the text
|
25853
|
4825 to be yanked ("pasted") the next time you yank.
|
|
4826
|
|
4827 ** If you enable Transient Mark mode and set `mark-even-if-inactive' to
|
|
4828 non-nil, then the region is highlighted in a transient fashion just as
|
|
4829 normally in Transient Mark mode, but the mark really remains active
|
|
4830 all the time; commands that use the region can be used even if the
|
|
4831 region highlighting turns off.
|
|
4832
|
|
4833 ** If you type C-h after a prefix key, it displays the bindings
|
|
4834 that start with that prefix.
|
|
4835
|
|
4836 ** The VC package now searches for version control commands in the
|
|
4837 directories named by the variable `vc-path'; its value should be a
|
|
4838 list of strings.
|
|
4839
|
|
4840 ** If you are visiting a file that has locks registered under RCS,
|
|
4841 VC now displays each lock's owner and version number in the mode line
|
|
4842 after the string `RCS'. If there are no locks, VC displays the head
|
|
4843 version number.
|
|
4844
|
|
4845 ** When using X, if you load the `paren' library, Emacs automatically
|
|
4846 underlines or highlights the matching paren whenever point is
|
|
4847 next to the outside of a paren. When point is before an open-paren,
|
|
4848 this shows the matching close; when point is after a close-paren,
|
|
4849 this shows the matching open.
|
|
4850
|
|
4851 ** The new function `define-key-after' is like `define-key',
|
|
4852 but takes an extra argument AFTER. It places the newly defined
|
|
4853 binding after the binding for the event AFTER.
|
|
4854
|
|
4855 ** `accessible-keymaps' now takes an optional second argument, PREFIX.
|
|
4856 If PREFIX is non-nil, it means the value should include only maps for
|
|
4857 keys that start with PREFIX.
|
|
4858
|
|
4859 `describe-bindings' also accepts an optional argument PREFIX which
|
|
4860 means to describe only the keys that start with PREFIX.
|
|
4861
|
|
4862 ** The variable `prefix-help-command' hold a command to run to display help
|
|
4863 whenever the character `help-char' follows a prefix key and does not have
|
|
4864 a key binding in that context.
|
|
4865
|
|
4866 ** Emacs now detects double- and triple-mouse clicks. A single mouse
|
|
4867 click produces a pair events of the form:
|
|
4868 (down-mouse-N POSITION)
|
|
4869 (mouse-N POSITION)
|
|
4870 Clicking the same mouse button again, soon thereafter and at the same
|
|
4871 location, produces another pair of events of the form:
|
|
4872 (down-mouse-N POSITION)
|
|
4873 (double-mouse-N POSITION 2)
|
|
4874 Another click will produce an event pair of the form:
|
|
4875 (down-mouse-N POSITION)
|
|
4876 (triple-mouse-N POSITION 3)
|
|
4877 All the POSITIONs in such a sequence would be identical, except for
|
|
4878 their timestamps.
|
|
4879
|
|
4880 To count as double- and triple-clicks, mouse clicks must be at the
|
|
4881 same location as the first click, and the number of milliseconds
|
|
4882 between the first release and the second must be less than the value
|
|
4883 of the lisp variable `double-click-time'. Setting `double-click-time'
|
|
4884 to nil disables multi-click detection. Setting it to t removes the
|
|
4885 time limit; Emacs then detects multi-clicks by position only.
|
|
4886
|
|
4887 If `read-key-sequence' finds no binding for a double-click event, but
|
|
4888 the corresponding single-click event would be bound,
|
|
4889 `read-key-sequence' demotes it to a single-click. Similarly, it
|
|
4890 demotes unbound triple-clicks to double- or single-clicks. This means
|
|
4891 you don't have to distinguish between single- and multi-clicks if you
|
|
4892 don't want to.
|
|
4893
|
|
4894 Emacs reports all clicks after the third as `triple-mouse-N' clicks,
|
|
4895 but increments the click count after POSITION. For example, a fourth
|
|
4896 click, soon after the third and at the same location, produces a pair
|
|
4897 of events of the form:
|
|
4898 (down-mouse-N POSITION)
|
|
4899 (triple-mouse-N POSITION 4)
|
|
4900
|
|
4901 ** The way Emacs reports positions of mouse events has changed
|
|
4902 slightly. If a mouse event includes a position list of the form:
|
|
4903 (WINDOW (PLACE-SYMBOL) (COLUMN . ROW) TIMESTAMP)
|
|
4904 this denotes exactly the same position as the list:
|
|
4905 (WINDOW PLACE-SYMBOL (COLUMN . ROW) TIMESTAMP)
|
|
4906 That is, the event occurred over a non-textual area of the frame,
|
|
4907 specified by PLACE-SYMBOL, a symbol like `mode-line' or
|
|
4908 `vertical-scroll-bar'.
|
|
4909
|
|
4910 Enclosing PLACE-SYMBOL in a singleton list does not change the
|
|
4911 position denoted, but the `read-key-sequence' function uses the
|
|
4912 presence or absence of the singleton list to tell whether or not it
|
|
4913 should prefix the event with its place symbol.
|
|
4914
|
|
4915 Normally, `read-key-sequence' prefixes mouse events occurring over
|
|
4916 non-textual areas with their PLACE-SYMBOLs, to select the sub-keymap
|
|
4917 appropriate for the event; for example, clicking on the mode line
|
|
4918 produces a sequence like
|
|
4919 [mode-line (mouse-1 POSN)]
|
|
4920 However, if lisp code elects to unread the resulting key sequence by
|
|
4921 placing it in the `unread-command-events' variable, it is important
|
|
4922 that `read-key-sequence' not insert the prefix symbol again; that
|
|
4923 would produce a malformed key sequence like
|
|
4924 [mode-line mode-line (mouse-1 POSN)]
|
|
4925 For this reason, `read-key-sequence' encloses the event's PLACE-SYMBOL
|
|
4926 in a singleton list when it first inserts the prefix, but doesn't
|
|
4927 insert the prefix when processing events whose PLACE-SYMBOLs are
|
|
4928 already thus enclosed.
|
|
4929
|
|
4930
|
|
4931 * Changes in version 19.15.
|
|
4932
|
|
4933 ** `make-frame-visible', which uniconified frames, is now a command,
|
|
4934 and thus may be bound to a key. This makes sense because frames
|
|
4935 respond to user input while iconified.
|
|
4936
|
|
4937 ** You can now use Meta mouse clicks to set and use the "secondary
|
|
4938 selection". You can drag M-Mouse-1 across the region you want to
|
|
4939 select. Or you can press M-Mouse-1 at one end and M-Mouse-3 at the
|
|
4940 other (this also copies the text to the kill ring). Repeating M-Mouse-3
|
|
4941 again at the same place kills that text.
|
|
4942
|
|
4943 M-Mouse-2 kills the secondary selection.
|
|
4944
|
|
4945 Setting the secondary selection does not move point or the mark. It
|
|
4946 is possible to make a secondary selection that does not all fit on the
|
|
4947 screen, by using M-Mouse-1 at one end, scrolling, then using M-Mouse-3
|
|
4948 at the other end.
|
|
4949
|
|
4950 Emacs has only one secondary selection at any time. Starting to set
|
|
4951 a new one cancels any previous one. The secondary selection displays
|
|
4952 using a face named `secondary-selection'.
|
|
4953
|
|
4954 ** There's a new way to request use of Supercite (sc.el). Do this:
|
|
4955
|
|
4956 (add-hook 'mail-citation-hook 'sc-cite-original)
|
|
4957
|
|
4958 Currently this works with Rmail. In the future, other Emacs based
|
|
4959 mail-readers should be modified to understand this hook also.
|
|
4960 In the mean time, you should keep doing what you have done in the past
|
|
4961 for those other mail readers.
|
|
4962
|
|
4963 ** When a regular expression contains `\(...\)' inside a repetition
|
|
4964 operator such as `*' or `+', and you ask about the range that was matched
|
|
4965 using `match-beginning' and `match-end', the range you get corresponds
|
|
4966 to the *last* repetition *only*. In Emacs 18, you would get a range
|
|
4967 corresponding to all the repetitions.
|
|
4968
|
|
4969 If you want to get a range corresponding to all the repetitions,
|
|
4970 put a `\(...\)' grouping *outside* the repetition operator. This
|
|
4971 is the syntax that corresponds logically to the desired result, and
|
|
4972 it works the same in Emacs 18 and Emacs 19.
|
|
4973
|
|
4974 (This change actually took place earlier, but we didn't know about it
|
|
4975 and thus didn't document it.)
|
|
4976
|
|
4977 * Changes in version 19.14.
|
|
4978
|
|
4979 ** To modify read-only text, bind the variable `inhibit-read-only'
|
|
4980 to a non-nil value. If the value is t, then all reasons that might
|
|
4981 make text read-only are inhibited (including `read-only' text properties).
|
|
4982 If the value is a list, then a `read-only' property is inhibited
|
|
4983 if it is `memq' in the list.
|
|
4984
|
|
4985 ** If you call `get-buffer-window' passing t as its second argument, it
|
|
4986 will only search for windows on visible frames. Previously, passing t
|
|
4987 as the secord argument caused `get-buffer-window' to search all
|
|
4988 frames, visible or not.
|
|
4989
|
|
4990 ** If you call `other-buffer' with a nil or omitted second argument, it
|
|
4991 will ignore buffers displayed windows on any visible frame, not just
|
|
4992 the selected frame.
|
|
4993
|
|
4994 ** You can specify a window or a frame for C-x # to use when
|
|
4995 selects a server buffer. Set the variable server-window
|
|
4996 to the window or frame that you want.
|
|
4997
|
|
4998 ** The command M-( now inserts spaces outside the open-parentheses in
|
|
4999 some cases--depending on the syntax classes of the surrounding
|
|
5000 characters. If the variable `parens-dont-require-spaces' is non-nil,
|
|
5001 it inhibits insertion of these spaces.
|
|
5002
|
|
5003 ** The GUD package now supports the debugger known as xdb on HP/UX
|
|
5004 systems. Use M-x xdb. The variable `gud-xdb-directories' lets you
|
|
5005 specify a list of directories to search for source code.
|
|
5006
|
|
5007 ** If you are using the mailabbrev package, you should note that its
|
|
5008 function for defining an alias is now called `define-mail-abbrev'.
|
|
5009 This package no longer contains a definition for `define-mail-alias';
|
|
5010 that name is used only in mailaliases.
|
|
5011
|
|
5012 ** Inserted characters now inherit the properties of the text before
|
|
5013 them, by default, rather than those of the following text.
|
|
5014
|
|
5015 ** The function `insert-file-contents' now takes optional arguments BEG
|
|
5016 and END that specify which part of the file to insert. BEG defaults to
|
|
5017 0 (the beginning of the file), and END defaults to the end of the file.
|
|
5018
|
|
5019 If you specify BEG or END, then the argument VISIT must be nil.
|
|
5020
|
|
5021 * Changes in version 19.13.
|
|
5022
|
|
5023 ** Magic file names can now handle the `load' operation.
|
|
5024
|
|
5025 ** Bibtex mode now sets up special entries in the menu bar.
|
|
5026
|
|
5027 ** The incremental search commands C-w and C-y, which copy text from
|
|
5028 the buffer into the search string, now convert it to lower case
|
|
5029 if you are in a case-insensitive search. This is to avoid making
|
|
5030 the search a case-sensitive one.
|
|
5031
|
|
5032 ** GNUS now knows your time zone automatically if Emacs does.
|
|
5033
|
|
5034 ** Hide-ifdef mode no longer defines keys of the form
|
|
5035 C-c LETTER, since those keys are reserved for users.
|
|
5036 Those commands have been moved to C-c M-LETTER.
|
|
5037 We may move them again for greater consistency with other modes.
|
|
5038
|
|
5039 * Changes in version 19.12.
|
|
5040
|
|
5041 ** You can now make many of the sort commands ignore case by setting
|
|
5042 `sort-fold-case' to a non-nil value.
|
|
5043
|
|
5044 * Changes in version 19.11.
|
|
5045
|
|
5046 ** Supercite is installed.
|
|
5047
|
|
5048 ** `write-file-hooks' functions that return non-nil are responsible
|
|
5049 for making a backup file if you want that to be done.
|
|
5050 To do so, execute the following code:
|
|
5051
|
|
5052 (or buffer-backed-up (backup-buffer))
|
|
5053
|
|
5054 You might wish to save the file modes value returned by
|
|
5055 `backup-buffer' and use that to set the mode bits of the file
|
|
5056 that you write. This is what `basic-save-buffer' does when
|
|
5057 it writes a file in the usual way.
|
|
5058
|
|
5059 (This is not actually new, but wasn't documented before.)
|
|
5060
|
|
5061 * Changes in version 19.10.
|
|
5062
|
|
5063 ** The command `repeat-complex-command' is now on C-x ESC ESC.
|
|
5064 It used to be bound to C-x ESC.
|
|
5065
|
|
5066 The reason for this change is to make function keys work after C-x.
|
|
5067
|
|
5068 ** The variable `highlight-nonselected-windows' now controls whether
|
|
5069 the region is highlighted in windows other than the selected window
|
|
5070 (in Transient Mark mode only, of course, and currently only when
|
|
5071 using X).
|
|
5072
|
|
5073 * Changes in version 19.8.
|
|
5074
|
|
5075 ** It is now simpler to tell Emacs to display accented characters under
|
|
5076 X windows. M-x standard-display-european toggles the display of
|
|
5077 buffer text according to the ISO Latin-1 standard. With a prefix
|
|
5078 argument, this command enables European character display iff the
|
|
5079 argument is positive.
|
|
5080
|
|
5081 ** The `-i' command-line argument tells Emacs to use a picture of the
|
|
5082 GNU gnu as its icon, instead of letting the window manager choose an
|
|
5083 icon for it. This option used to insert a file into the current
|
|
5084 buffer; use `-insert' to do that now.
|
|
5085
|
|
5086 ** The `configure' script now supports `--prefix' and `--exec-prefix'
|
|
5087 options.
|
|
5088
|
|
5089 The `--prefix=PREFIXDIR' option specifies where the installation process
|
|
5090 should put emacs and its data files. This defaults to `/usr/local'.
|
|
5091 - Emacs (and the other utilities users run) go in PREFIXDIR/bin
|
|
5092 (unless the `--exec-prefix' option says otherwise).
|
|
5093 - The architecture-independent files go in PREFIXDIR/lib/emacs/VERSION
|
|
5094 (where VERSION is the version number of Emacs, like `19.7').
|
|
5095 - The architecture-dependent files go in
|
|
5096 PREFIXDIR/lib/emacs/VERSION/CONFIGURATION
|
|
5097 (where CONFIGURATION is the configuration name, like mips-dec-ultrix4.2),
|
|
5098 unless the `--exec-prefix' option says otherwise.
|
|
5099
|
|
5100 The `--exec-prefix=EXECDIR' option allows you to specify a separate
|
|
5101 portion of the directory tree for installing architecture-specific
|
|
5102 files, like executables and utility programs. If specified,
|
|
5103 - Emacs (and the other utilities users run) go in EXECDIR/bin, and
|
|
5104 - The architecture-dependent files go in
|
|
5105 EXECDIR/lib/emacs/VERSION/CONFIGURATION.
|
|
5106 EXECDIR/bin should be a directory that is normally in users' PATHs.
|
|
5107
|
|
5108 ** When running under X, the new lisp function `x-list-fonts'
|
|
5109 allows code to find out which fonts are available from the X server.
|
|
5110 The first argument PATTERN is a string, perhaps with wildcard characters;
|
|
5111 the * character matches any substring, and
|
|
5112 the ? character matches any single character.
|
|
5113 PATTERN is case-insensitive.
|
|
5114 If the optional arguments FACE and FRAME are specified, then
|
|
5115 `x-list-fonts' returns only fonts the same size as FACE on FRAME.
|
|
5116
|
|
5117
|
|
5118
|
|
5119 * Changes in version 19.
|
|
5120
|
|
5121 ** When you kill buffers, Emacs now returns memory to the operating system,
|
|
5122 thus reducing the size of the Emacs process. All the space that you free
|
|
5123 up by killing buffers can now be reused for other buffers no matter what
|
|
5124 their sizes, or reused by other processes if Emacs doesn't need it.
|
|
5125
|
|
5126 ** Emacs now does garbage collection and auto saving while it is waiting
|
|
5127 for input, which often avoids the need to do these things while you
|
|
5128 are typing.
|
|
5129
|
|
5130 The variable `auto-save-timeout' says how many seconds Emacs should
|
|
5131 wait, after you stop typing, before it does an auto save and a garbage
|
|
5132 collection.
|
|
5133
|
|
5134 ** If auto saving detects that a buffer has shrunk greatly, it refrains
|
|
5135 from auto saving that buffer and displays a warning. Now it also turns
|
|
5136 off Auto Save mode in that buffer, so that you won't get the same
|
|
5137 warning again.
|
|
5138
|
|
5139 If you reenable Auto Save mode in that buffer, Emacs will start saving
|
|
5140 it again with no further warnings.
|
|
5141
|
|
5142 ** A new minor mode called Line Number mode displays the current line
|
|
5143 number in the mode line, updating it as necessary when you move
|
|
5144 point.
|
|
5145
|
|
5146 However, if the buffer is very large (larger than the value of
|
|
5147 `line-number-display-limit'), then the line number doesn't appear.
|
|
5148 This is because computing the line number can be painfully slow if the
|
|
5149 buffer is very large.
|
|
5150
|
|
5151 ** You can quit while Emacs is waiting to read or write files.
|
|
5152
|
|
5153 ** The arrow keys now have default bindings to move in the appropriate
|
49600
|
5154 directions.
|
25853
|
5155
|
|
5156 ** You can suppress next-line's habit of inserting a newline when
|
|
5157 called at the end of a buffer by setting next-line-add-newlines to nil
|
|
5158 (it defaults to t).
|
|
5159
|
|
5160 ** You can now get back recent minibuffer inputs conveniently. While
|
|
5161 in the minibuffer, type M-p to fetch the next earlier minibuffer
|
|
5162 input, and use M-n to fetch the next later input.
|
|
5163
|
|
5164 There are also commands to search forward or backward through the
|
|
5165 history for history elements that match a regular expression. M-r
|
|
5166 searches older elements in the history, while M-s searches newer
|
|
5167 elements. By special dispensation, these commands can always use the
|
|
5168 minibuffer to read their arguments even though you are already in the
|
|
5169 minibuffer when you issue them.
|
|
5170
|
|
5171 The history feature is available for all uses of the minibuffer, but
|
|
5172 there are separate history lists for different kinds of input. For
|
|
5173 example, there is a list for file names, used by all the commands that
|
|
5174 read file names. There is a list for arguments of commands like
|
|
5175 `query-replace'. There are also very specific history lists, such
|
|
5176 as the one that `compile' uses for compilation commands.
|
|
5177
|
|
5178 ** You can now display text in a mixture of fonts and colors, using the
|
|
5179 "face" feature, together with the overlay and text property features.
|
|
5180 See the Emacs Lisp manual for details. The Emacs Users Manual describes
|
|
5181 how to change the colors and font of standard predefined faces.
|
|
5182
|
|
5183 ** You can refer to files on other machines using special file name syntax:
|
|
5184
|
|
5185 /HOST:FILENAME
|
|
5186 /USER@HOST:FILENAME
|
|
5187
|
|
5188 When you do this, Emacs uses the FTP program to read and write files on
|
|
5189 the specified host. It logs in through FTP using your user name or the
|
|
5190 name USER. It may ask you for a password from time to time; this
|
|
5191 is used for logging in on HOST.
|
|
5192
|
|
5193 ** Some C-x key bindings have been moved onto new prefix keys.
|
|
5194
|
|
5195 C-x r is a prefix for registers and rectangles.
|
|
5196 C-x n is a prefix for narrowing.
|
|
5197 C-x a is a prefix for abbrev commands.
|
|
5198
|
|
5199 C-x r C-SPC
|
|
5200 C-x r SPC point-to-register (Was C-x /)
|
|
5201 C-x r j jump-to-register (Was C-x j)
|
|
5202 C-x r s copy-to-register (Was C-x x)
|
|
5203 C-x r i insert-register (Was C-x g)
|
|
5204 C-x r r copy-rectangle-to-register (Was C-x r)
|
|
5205 C-x r k kill-rectangle
|
|
5206 C-x r y yank-rectangle
|
|
5207 C-x r o open-rectangle
|
|
5208 C-x r f frame-configuration-to-register
|
|
5209 (This saves the state of all windows in all frames.)
|
|
5210 C-x r w window-configuration-to-register
|
|
5211 (This saves the state of all windows in the selected frame.)
|
|
5212
|
|
5213 (Use C-x r j to restore a configuration saved with C-x r f or C-x r w.)
|
|
5214
|
|
5215 C-x n n narrow-to-region (Was C-x n)
|
|
5216 C-x n p narrow-to-page (Was C-x p)
|
|
5217 C-x n w widen (Was C-x w)
|
|
5218
|
|
5219 C-x a l add-mode-abbrev (Was C-x C-a)
|
|
5220 C-x a g add-global-abbrev (Was C-x +)
|
|
5221 C-x a i l inverse-add-mode-abbrev (Was C-x C-h)
|
|
5222 C-x a i g inverse-add-global-abbrev (Was C-x -)
|
|
5223 C-x a e expand-abbrev (Was C-x ')
|
|
5224
|
|
5225 (The old key bindings C-x /, C-x j, C-x x and C-x g
|
|
5226 have not yet been removed.)
|
|
5227
|
|
5228 ** You can put a file name in a register to be able to visit the file
|
|
5229 quickly. Do this:
|
|
5230
|
|
5231 (set-register ?CHAR '(file . NAME))
|
|
5232
|
|
5233 where NAME is the file name as a string. Then C-x r j CHAR finds that
|
|
5234 file.
|
|
5235
|
|
5236 This is useful for files that you need to visit frequently,
|
|
5237 but that you don't want to keep in buffers all the time.
|
|
5238
|
|
5239 ** The keys M-g (fill-region) and C-x a (append-to-buffer)
|
|
5240 have been eliminated.
|
|
5241
|
|
5242 ** The new command `string-rectangle' inserts a specified string on
|
|
5243 each line of the region-rectangle.
|
|
5244
|
|
5245 ** C-x 4 r is now `find-file-read-only-other-window'.
|
|
5246
|
|
5247 ** C-x 4 C-o is now `display-buffer', which displays a specified buffer
|
|
5248 in another window without selecting it.
|
|
5249
|
|
5250 ** Picture mode has been substantially improved. The picture editing commands
|
|
5251 now arrange for automatic horizontal scrolling to keep point visible
|
|
5252 when editing a wide buffer with truncate-lines on. Picture-mode
|
|
5253 initialization now does a better job of rebinding standard commands;
|
|
5254 it finds not just their normal keybindings, but any function keys
|
|
5255 attached to them.
|
|
5256
|
|
5257 ** If you enable Transient Mark mode, then the mark becomes "inactive"
|
|
5258 after every command that modifies the buffer. While the mark is
|
|
5259 active, the region is highlighted (under X, at least). Most commands
|
|
5260 that use the mark give an error if the mark is inactive, but you can
|
|
5261 use C-x C-x to make it active again. This feature is also sometimes
|
|
5262 known as "Zmacs mode".
|
|
5263
|
|
5264 ** Outline mode is now available as a minor mode. This minor mode can
|
|
5265 combine with any major mode; it substitutes the C-c commands of
|
|
5266 Outline mode for those of the major mode. Use M-x outline-minor-mode
|
|
5267 to enable and disable the new mode.
|
|
5268
|
|
5269 M-x outline-mode is unchanged; it still switches to Outline mode as a
|
|
5270 major mode.
|
|
5271
|
|
5272 ** The default setting of `version-control' comes from the environment
|
|
5273 variable VERSION_CONTROL.
|
|
5274
|
|
5275 ** The user option for controlling whether files can set local
|
|
5276 variables is now called `enable-local-variables'. A value of t means
|
|
5277 local-variables lists are obeyed; nil means they are ignored; anything
|
|
5278 else means query the user.
|
|
5279
|
|
5280 The user option for controlling use of the `eval' local variable is
|
|
5281 now called is `enable-local-eval'; its values are interpreted like
|
|
5282 those of `enable-local-variables'.
|
|
5283
|
|
5284 ** X Window System changes:
|
|
5285
|
|
5286 C-x 5 C-f and C-x 5 b switch to a specified file or buffer in a new
|
|
5287 frame. Likewise, C-x 5 m starts outgoing mail in another frame, and
|
|
5288 C-x 5 . finds a tag in another frame.
|
|
5289
|
|
5290 When you are using X, C-z now iconifies the selected frame.
|
|
5291
|
|
5292 Emacs can now exchange text with other X applications. Killing or
|
|
5293 copying text in Emacs now makes that text available for pasting into
|
|
5294 other X applications. The Emacs yanking commands now insert the
|
|
5295 latest selection set by other applications, and add the text to the
|
|
5296 kill ring. The Emacs commands for selecting and inserting text with
|
|
5297 the mouse now use the kill ring in the same way the keyboard killing
|
|
5298 and yanking commands do.
|
|
5299
|
|
5300 The option to specify the title for the initial frame is now `-name NAME'.
|
|
5301 There is currently no way to specify an icon title; perhaps we will add
|
|
5302 one in the future.
|
|
5303
|
|
5304 ** Undoing a deletion now puts point back where it was before the
|
|
5305 deletion.
|
|
5306
|
|
5307 ** The variables that control how much undo information to save have
|
|
5308 been renamed to `undo-limit' and `undo-strong-limit'. They used to be
|
|
5309 called `undo-threshold' and `undo-high-threshold'.
|
|
5310
|
|
5311 ** You can now use kill commands in read-only buffers. They don't
|
|
5312 actually change the buffer, and Emacs will beep and warn you that the
|
|
5313 buffer is read-only, but they do copy the text you tried to kill into
|
|
5314 the kill ring, so you can yank it into other buffers.
|
|
5315
|
|
5316 ** C-o inserts the fill-prefix on the newly created line. The command
|
|
5317 M-^ deletes the prefix (if it occurs) after the newline that it
|
|
5318 deletes.
|
|
5319
|
|
5320 ** C-M-l now runs the command `reposition-window'. It scrolls the
|
|
5321 window heuristically in a way designed to get useful information onto
|
|
5322 the screen.
|
|
5323
|
|
5324 ** C-M-r is now reverse incremental regexp search.
|
|
5325
|
|
5326 ** M-z now kills through the target character. In version 18, it
|
|
5327 killed up to but not including the target character.
|
|
5328
|
|
5329 ** M-! now runs the specified shell command asynchronously if it
|
|
5330 ends in `&' (just as the shell does).
|
|
5331
|
|
5332 ** C-h C-f and C-h C-k are new help commands that display the Info
|
|
5333 node for a given Emacs function name or key sequence, respectively.
|
|
5334
|
|
5335 ** The C-h p command system lets you find Emacs Lisp packages by
|
|
5336 topic keywords. Here is a partial list of package categories:
|
|
5337
|
|
5338 abbrev abbreviation handling, typing shortcuts, macros
|
|
5339 bib code related to the bib bibliography processor
|
|
5340 c C and C++ language support
|
|
5341 calendar calendar and time management support
|
|
5342 comm communications, networking, remote access to files
|
|
5343 docs support for Emacs documentation
|
|
5344 emulations emulations of other editors
|
|
5345 extensions Emacs Lisp language extensions
|
|
5346 games games, jokes and amusements
|
|
5347 hardware support for interfacing with exotic hardware
|
|
5348 help support for on-line help systems
|
|
5349 i14n internationalization and alternate character-set support
|
|
5350 internal code for Emacs internals, build process, defaults
|
|
5351 languages specialized modes for editing programming languages
|
|
5352 lisp Lisp support, including Emacs Lisp
|
|
5353 local code local to your site
|
|
5354 maint maintenance aids for the Emacs development group
|
|
5355 mail modes for electronic-mail handling
|
|
5356 news support for netnews reading and posting
|
|
5357 processes process, subshell, compilation, and job control support
|
|
5358 terminals support for terminal types
|
|
5359 tex code related to the TeX formatter
|
|
5360 tools programming tools
|
|
5361 unix front-ends/assistants for, or emulators of, UNIX features
|
|
5362 vms support code for vms
|
|
5363 wp word processing
|
|
5364
|
|
5365 More will be added soon.
|
|
5366
|
|
5367 ** The command to split a window into two side-by-side windows is now
|
|
5368 C-x 3. It was C-x 5.
|
|
5369
|
|
5370 ** M-. (find-tag) no longer has any effect on what M-, will do
|
|
5371 subsequently. You can no longer use M-, to find the next similar tag;
|
|
5372 you must use M-. with a prefix argument, instead.
|
|
5373
|
|
5374 The motive for this change is so that you can more reliably use
|
|
5375 M-, to resume a suspended `tags-search' or `tags-query-replace'.
|
|
5376
|
|
5377 ** C-x s (`save-some-buffers') now gives you more options when it asks
|
|
5378 whether to save a particular buffer. In addition to `y' or `n', you
|
|
5379 can answer `!' to save all the remaining buffers, `.' to save this
|
|
5380 buffer but not save any others, ESC to stop saving and exit the
|
49600
|
5381 command, and C-h to get help. These options are analogous to those
|
25853
|
5382 of `query-replace'.
|
|
5383
|
|
5384 ** M-x make-symbolic-link does not expand its first argument.
|
|
5385 This lets you make a link with a target that is a relative file name.
|
|
5386
|
|
5387 ** M-x add-change-log-entry and C-x 4 a now automatically insert the
|
|
5388 name of the file and often the name of the function that you changed.
|
|
5389 They also handle grouping of entries.
|
|
5390
|
|
5391 There is now a special major mode for editing ChangeLog files. It
|
|
5392 makes filling work conveniently. Each bunch of grouped entries is one
|
|
5393 paragraph, and each collection of entries from one person on one day
|
|
5394 is considered a page.
|
|
5395
|
|
5396 ** The `comment-region' command adds comment delimiters to the lines that
|
|
5397 start in the region, thus commenting them out. With a negative argument,
|
|
5398 it deletes comment delimiters from the lines in the region--this cancels
|
|
5399 the effect of `comment-region' without an argument.
|
|
5400
|
|
5401 With a positive argument, `comment-region' adds comment delimiters
|
|
5402 but duplicates the last character of the comment start sequence as many
|
|
5403 times as the argument specifies. This is a way of calling attention to
|
|
5404 the comment. In Lisp, you should use an argument at least two, because
|
|
5405 the indentation convention for single semicolon comments does not leave
|
|
5406 them at the beginning of a line.
|
|
5407
|
|
5408 ** If `split-window-keep-point' is non-nil, C-x 2 tries to avoid
|
|
5409 shifting any text on the screen by putting point in whichever window
|
|
5410 happens to contain the screen line the cursor is already on.
|
|
5411 The default is that `split-window-keep-point' is non-nil on slow
|
|
5412 terminals.
|
|
5413
|
|
5414 ** M-x super-apropos is like M-x apropos except that it searches both
|
|
5415 Lisp symbol names and documentation strings for matches. It describes
|
|
5416 every symbol that has a match in either the symbol's name or its
|
|
5417 documentation.
|
|
5418
|
|
5419 Both M-x apropos and M-x super-apropos take an optional second
|
|
5420 argument DO-ALL which controls the more expensive part of the job.
|
|
5421 This includes looking up and printing the key bindings of all
|
|
5422 commands. It also includes checking documentation strings in
|
|
5423 super-apropos. DO-ALL is nil by default; use a prefix arg to make it
|
|
5424 non-nil.
|
|
5425
|
|
5426 ** M-x revert-buffer no longer offers to revert from a recent auto-save
|
|
5427 file unless you give it a prefix argument. Otherwise it always
|
|
5428 reverts from the real file regardless of whether there has been an
|
|
5429 auto-save since thenm. (Reverting from the auto-save file is no longer
|
|
5430 very useful now that the undo capacity is larger.)
|
|
5431
|
|
5432 ** M-x recover-file no longer turns off Auto Save mode when it reads
|
|
5433 the last Auto Save file.
|
|
5434
|
|
5435 ** M-x rename-buffer, if you give it a prefix argument,
|
|
5436 avoids errors by modifying the new name to make it unique.
|
|
5437
|
|
5438 ** M-x rename-uniquely renames the current buffer to a similar name
|
|
5439 with a numeric suffix added to make it both different and unique.
|
|
5440
|
|
5441 One use of this command is for creating multiple shell buffers.
|
|
5442 If you rename your shell buffer, and then do M-x shell again, it
|
|
5443 makes a new shell buffer. This method is also good for mail buffers,
|
|
5444 compilation buffers, and any Emacs feature which creates a special
|
|
5445 buffer with a particular name.
|
|
5446
|
|
5447 ** M-x compare-windows with a prefix argument ignores changes in whitespace.
|
|
5448 If `compare-ignore-case' is non-nil, then differences in case are also
|
|
5449 ignored.
|
|
5450
|
|
5451 ** `backward-paragraph' is now bound to M-{ by default, and `forward-paragraph'
|
|
5452 to M-}. Originally, these commands were bound to M-[ and M-], but they were
|
|
5453 running into conflicts with the use of function keys. On many terminals,
|
|
5454 function keys send a sequence beginning ESC-[, so many users have defined this
|
|
5455 as a prefix key.
|
|
5456
|
|
5457 ** C-x C-u (upcase-region) and C-x C-l (downcase-region) are now disabled by
|
|
5458 default; these commands seem to be often hit by accident, and can be
|
|
5459 quite destructive if their effects are not noticed immediately.
|
|
5460
|
|
5461 ** The function `erase-buffer' is now interactive, but disabled by default.
|
|
5462
|
|
5463 ** When visiting a new file, Emacs attempts to abbreviate the file's
|
|
5464 path using the symlinks listed in `directory-abbrev-alist'.
|
|
5465
|
|
5466 ** When you visit the same file in under two names that translate into
|
|
5467 the same name once symbolic links are handled, Emacs warns you that
|
|
5468 you have two buffers for the same file.
|
|
5469
|
|
5470 ** If you wish to avoid visiting the same file in two buffers under
|
|
5471 different names, set the variable `find-file-existing-other-name'
|
|
5472 non-nil. Then `find-file' uses the existing buffer visiting the file,
|
|
5473 no matter which of the file's names you specify.
|
|
5474
|
|
5475 ** If you set `find-file-visit-truename' non-nil, then the file name
|
|
5476 recorded for a buffer is the file's truename (in which all symbolic
|
|
5477 links have been removed), rather than the name you specify. Setting
|
|
5478 `find-file-visit-truename' also implies the effect of
|
|
5479 `find-file-existing-other-name'.
|
|
5480
|
|
5481 ** C-x C-v now inserts the entire current file name in the minibuffer.
|
|
5482 This is convenient if you made a small mistake in typing it. Point
|
|
5483 goes after the last slash, before the last file name component, so if
|
|
5484 you want to replace it entirely, you can use C-k right away to delete
|
|
5485 it.
|
|
5486
|
|
5487 ** Commands such as C-M-f in Lisp mode now ignore parentheses within comments.
|
|
5488
|
|
5489 ** C-x q now uses ESC to terminate all iterations of the keyboard
|
|
5490 macro, rather than C-d as before.
|
|
5491
|
|
5492 ** Use the command `setenv' to set an individual environment variable
|
|
5493 for Emacs subprocesses. Specify a variable name and a value, both as
|
|
5494 strings. This command applies only to subprocesses yet to be
|
|
5495 started.
|
|
5496
|
|
5497 ** Use `rot13-other-window' to examine a buffer with rot13.
|
|
5498
|
|
5499 This command does not change the text in the buffer. Instead, it
|
|
5500 creates a window with a funny display table that applies the code when
|
|
5501 displaying the text.
|
|
5502
|
|
5503 ** The command `M-x version' now prints the current Emacs version; The
|
|
5504 `version' command is an alias for the `emacs-version' command.
|
|
5505
|
|
5506 ** More complex changes in existing packages.
|
|
5507
|
|
5508 *** `fill-nonuniform-paragraphs' is a new command, much like
|
|
5509 `fill-individual-paragraphs' except that only separator lines separate
|
|
5510 paragraphs. Since this means that the lines of one paragraph may have
|
|
5511 different amounts of indentation, the fill prefix used is the smallest
|
|
5512 amount of indentation of any of the lines of the paragraph.
|
|
5513
|
|
5514 *** Filling is now partially controlled by a new minor mode, Adaptive
|
|
5515 Fill mode. When this mode is enabled (and it is enabled by default),
|
|
5516 if you use M-x fill-region-as-paragraph on an indented paragraph and
|
|
5517 you don't have a fill prefix, it uses the indentation of the second
|
|
5518 line of the paragraph as the fill prefix.
|
|
5519
|
|
5520 Adaptive Fill mode doesn't have much effect on M-q in most major
|
|
5521 modes, because an indented line will probably count as a paragraph
|
|
5522 starter and thus each line of an indented paragraph will be considered
|
|
5523 a paragraph of its own.
|
|
5524
|
|
5525 *** M-q in C mode now runs `c-fill-paragraph', which is designed
|
|
5526 for filling C comments. (We assume you don't want to fill
|
|
5527 the code in a C program.)
|
|
5528
|
|
5529 *** M-$ now runs the Ispell program instead of the Unix spell program.
|
|
5530
|
|
5531 M-$ starts an Ispell process the first time you use it. But the process
|
|
5532 stays alive, so that subsequent uses of M-$ run very fast.
|
|
5533 If you want to get rid of the process, use M-x kill-ispell.
|
|
5534
|
|
5535 To check the entire current buffer, use M-x ispell-buffer.
|
|
5536 Use M-x ispell-region to check just the current region.
|
|
5537
|
|
5538 Ispell commands often involve interactive replacement of words.
|
|
5539 You can interrupt the interactive replacement with C-g.
|
|
5540 You can restart it again afterward with C-u M-$.
|
|
5541
|
|
5542 During interactive replacement, you can type the following characters:
|
|
5543
|
|
5544 a Accept this word this time.
|
|
5545 DIGIT Replace the word (this time) with one of the displayed near-misses.
|
|
5546 The digit you use says which near-miss to use.
|
|
5547 i Insert this word in your private dictionary
|
|
5548 so that Ispell will consider it correct it from now on.
|
|
5549 r Replace the word this time with a string typed by you.
|
|
5550
|
|
5551 When the Ispell process starts, it reads your private dictionary which
|
|
5552 is the file `~/ispell.words'. If you "insert" words with the `i' command,
|
|
5553 these words are added to that file, but not right away--only at the end
|
|
5554 of the interactive replacement process.
|
|
5555
|
|
5556 Use M-x reload-ispell to reload your private dictionary from
|
|
5557 `~/ispell.words' if you edit it outside of Ispell.
|
|
5558
|
|
5559 ** Changes in existing modes.
|
|
5560
|
|
5561 *** gdb-mode has been replaced by gud-mode.
|
|
5562
|
|
5563 The package gud.el (Grand Unified Debugger) replaces gdb.el in Emacs
|
|
5564 19. It provides a gdb.el-like interface to any of three debuggers;
|
|
5565 gdb itself, the sdb debugger supported on some Unix systems, or the
|
|
5566 dbx debugger on Berkeley systems.
|
|
5567
|
|
5568 You start it up with one of the commands M-x gdb, M-x sdb, or
|
|
5569 M-x dbx. Each entry point finishes by executing a hook; gdb-mode-hook,
|
|
5570 sdb-mode-hook or dbx-mode-hook respectively.
|
|
5571
|
|
5572 These bindings have changed:
|
|
5573 C-x C-a > gud-down (was M-d)
|
|
5574 C-x C-a < gud-up (was M-u)
|
|
5575 C-x C-a C-r gud-cont (was M-c)
|
|
5576 C-x C-a C-n gud-next (was M-n)
|
|
5577 C-x C-a C-s gud-step (was M-s)
|
|
5578 C-x C-a C-i gud-stepi (was M-i)
|
|
5579 C-x C-a C-l gud-recenter (was C-l)
|
|
5580 C-d comint-delchar-or-maybe-eof (was C-c C-d)
|
|
5581
|
|
5582 These bindings have been removed:
|
|
5583 C-c C-r (was comint-show-output; now gud-cont)
|
|
5584
|
|
5585 Since GUD mode uses comint, it uses comint's input history commands,
|
|
5586 superseding C-c C-y (copy-last-shell-input):
|
|
5587 M-p comint-next-input
|
|
5588 M-n comint-previous-input
|
|
5589 M-r comint-previous-similar-input
|
|
5590 M-s comint-next-similar-input
|
|
5591 M-C-r comint-previous-input-matching
|
|
5592
|
|
5593 The C-x C-a bindings are also active in source files.
|
|
5594
|
|
5595 *** The old TeX mode bindings of M-{ and M-} have been moved to C-c {
|
|
5596 and C-c }. (These commands are `up-list' and `tex-insert-braces';
|
49600
|
5597 they are the TeX equivalents of M-( and M-).) This is because M-{
|
25853
|
5598 and M-} are now globally defined commands.
|
|
5599
|
|
5600 *** Changes in Mail mode.
|
|
5601
|
|
5602 `%' is now a word-separator character in Mail mode.
|
|
5603
|
|
5604 `mail-signature', if non-nil, tells M-x mail to insert your
|
|
5605 `.signature' file automatically. If you don't want your signature in
|
|
5606 a particular message, just delete it before you send the message.
|
|
5607
|
|
5608 You can specify the text to insert at the beginning of each line when
|
|
5609 you use C-c C-y to yank the message you are replying to. Set
|
|
5610 `mail-yank-prefix' to the desired string. A value of `nil' (the
|
|
5611 default) means to use indentation, as in Emacs 18. If you use just
|
|
5612 C-u as the prefix argument to C-c C-y, then it does not insert
|
|
5613 anything at the beginning of the lines, regardless of the value of
|
|
5614 `mail-yank-prefix'.
|
|
5615
|
|
5616 If you like, you can expand mail aliases as abbrevs, as soon as you
|
|
5617 type them in. To enable this feature, execute the following:
|
|
5618
|
|
5619 (add-hook 'mail-setup-hook 'mail-abbrevs-setup)
|
|
5620
|
|
5621 This can go in your .emacs file.
|
|
5622
|
|
5623 Word abbrevs don't expand unless you insert a word-separator character
|
|
5624 afterward. Any mail aliases that you didn't expand at insertion time
|
|
5625 are expanded subsequently when you send the message.
|
|
5626
|
|
5627 *** Changes in Rmail.
|
|
5628
|
|
5629 Rmail by default gets new mail only from the system inbox file,
|
|
5630 not from `~/mbox'.
|
|
5631
|
|
5632 In Rmail, you can retry sending a message that failed
|
|
5633 by typing `M-m' on the failure message.
|
|
5634
|
|
5635 By contrast, another new command M-x rmail-resend is used for
|
|
5636 forwarding a message and marking it as "resent from" you
|
|
5637 with header fields "Resent-From:" and "Resent-To:".
|
|
5638
|
|
5639 `e' is now the command to edit a message.
|
|
5640 To expunge, type `x'. We know this will surprise people
|
|
5641 some of the time, but the surprise will not be disastrous--if
|
|
5642 you type `e' meaning to expunge, just turn off editing with C-c C-c
|
|
5643 and then type `x'.
|
|
5644
|
|
5645 Another new Rmail command is `<', which moves to the first message.
|
|
5646 This is for symmetry with `>'.
|
|
5647
|
|
5648 Use the `b' command to bury the Rmail buffer and its summary buffer,
|
|
5649 if any, removing both of them from display on the screen.
|
|
5650
|
|
5651 The variable `rmail-output-file-alist' now controls the default
|
|
5652 for the file to output a message to.
|
|
5653
|
|
5654 In the Rmail summary buffer, all cursor motion commands select
|
|
5655 the message you move to. It's really neat when you use
|
|
5656 incremental search.
|
|
5657
|
|
5658 You can now issue most Rmail commands from an Rmail summary buffer.
|
|
5659 The commands do the same thing in that buffer that they do in the
|
|
5660 Rmail buffer. They apply to the message that is selected in the Rmail
|
|
5661 buffer, which is always the one described by the current summary
|
|
5662 line.
|
|
5663
|
|
5664 Conversely, motion and deletion commands in the Rmail buffer also
|
|
5665 update the summary buffer. If you set the variable
|
|
5666 `rmail-redisplay-summary' to a non-nil value, then they bring the
|
|
5667 summary buffer (if one exists) back onto the screen.
|
|
5668
|
|
5669 C-M-t is a new command to make a summary by topic. It uses regexp
|
|
5670 matching against just the subjects of the messages to decide which
|
|
5671 messages to show in the summary.
|
|
5672
|
|
5673 You can easily convert an Rmail file to system mailbox format with the
|
|
5674 command `unrmail'. This command reads two arguments, the name of
|
|
5675 the Rmail file to convert, and the name of the new mailbox file.
|
|
5676 (This command does not change the Rmail file itself.)
|
|
5677
|
|
5678 Rmail now handles Content Length fields in messages.
|
|
5679
|
|
5680 *** `mail-extract-address-components' unpacks mail addresses.
|
|
5681 It takes an address as a string (the contents of the From field, for
|
|
5682 example) and returns a list of the form (FULL-NAME
|
|
5683 CANONICAL-ADDRESS).
|
|
5684
|
|
5685 *** Changes in C mode and C-related commands.
|
|
5686
|
|
5687 **** M-x c-up-conditional
|
|
5688
|
|
5689 In C mode, `c-up-conditional' moves back to the containing
|
|
5690 preprocessor conditional, setting the mark where point was
|
|
5691 previously.
|
|
5692
|
|
5693 A prefix argument acts as a repeat count. With a negative argument,
|
|
5694 this command moves forward to the end of the containing preprocessor
|
|
5695 conditional. When going backwards, `#elif' acts like `#else' followed
|
|
5696 by `#if'. When going forwards, `#elif' is ignored.
|
|
5697
|
|
5698 **** In C mode, M-a and M-e are now defined as
|
|
5699 `c-beginning-of-statement' and `c-end-of-statement'.
|
|
5700
|
|
5701 **** In C mode, M-x c-backslash-region is a new command to insert or
|
|
5702 align `\' characters at the ends of the lines of the region, except
|
|
5703 for the last such line. This is useful after writing or editing a C
|
|
5704 macro definition.
|
|
5705
|
|
5706 If a line already ends in `\', this command adjusts the amount of
|
|
5707 whitespace before it. Otherwise, it inserts a new `\'.
|
|
5708
|
|
5709 *** New features in info.
|
|
5710
|
|
5711 When Info looks for an Info file, it searches the directories
|
|
5712 in `Info-directory-list'. This makes it easy to install the Info files
|
|
5713 that come with various packages. You can specify the path with
|
|
5714 the environment variable INFOPATH.
|
|
5715
|
|
5716 There are new commands in Info mode.
|
|
5717
|
|
5718 `]' now moves forward a node, going up and down levels as needed.
|
|
5719 `[' is similar but moves backward. These two commands try to traverse
|
|
5720 the entire Info tree, node by node. They are the equivalent of reading
|
|
5721 a printed manual sequentially.
|
|
5722
|
|
5723 `<' moves to the top node of the current Info file.
|
|
5724 `>' moves to the last node of the file.
|
|
5725
|
|
5726 SPC scrolls through the current node; at the end, it advances to the
|
|
5727 next node in depth-first order (like `]').
|
|
5728
|
|
5729 DEL scrolls backwards in the current node; at the end, it moves to the
|
|
5730 previous node in depth-first order (like `[').
|
|
5731
|
|
5732 After a menu select, the info `up' command now restores point in the
|
|
5733 menu. The combination of this and the previous two changes means that
|
|
5734 repeated SPC keystrokes do the right (depth-first traverse forward) thing.
|
|
5735
|
|
5736 `i STRING RET' moves to the node associated with STRING in the index
|
|
5737 or indices of this manual. If there is more than one match for
|
|
5738 STRING, the `i' command finds the first match.
|
|
5739
|
|
5740 `,' finds the next match for the string in the previous `i' command
|
|
5741
|
|
5742 If you click the middle mouse button near a cross-reference,
|
|
5743 menu item or node pointer while in Info, you will go to the node
|
|
5744 which is referenced.
|
|
5745
|
|
5746 *** Changes in M-x compile.
|
|
5747
|
|
5748 You can repeat any previous compilation command conveniently using the
|
|
5749 minibuffer history commands, while in the minibuffer entering the
|
|
5750 compilation command.
|
|
5751
|
|
5752 While a compilation is going on, the string `Compiling' appears in
|
|
5753 the mode line. When this string disappears, that tells you the
|
|
5754 compilation is finished.
|
|
5755
|
|
5756 The buffer of compiler messages is in Compilation mode. This mode
|
|
5757 provides the keys SPC and DEL to scroll by screenfuls, and M-n and M-p
|
|
5758 to move to the next or previous error message. You can also use C-c
|
|
5759 C-c on any error message to find the corresponding source code.
|
|
5760
|
|
5761 Emacs 19 has a more general parser for compiler messages. For example, it
|
|
5762 can understand messages from lint, and from certain C compilers whose error
|
|
5763 message format is unusual. Also, it only parses until it sees the error
|
|
5764 message you want; you never have to wait a long time to see the first
|
|
5765 error, no matter how big the buffer is.
|
|
5766
|
|
5767 *** M-x diff and M-x diff-backup.
|
|
5768
|
|
5769 This new command compares two files, displaying the differences in an
|
|
5770 Emacs buffer. The options for the `diff' program come from the
|
|
5771 variable `diff-switches', whose value should be a string.
|
|
5772
|
|
5773 The buffer of differences has Compilation mode as its major mode, so you
|
|
5774 can use C-x ` to visit successive changed locations in the two
|
|
5775 source files, or you can move to a particular hunk of changes and type
|
|
5776 C-c C-c to move to the corresponding source. You can also use the
|
|
5777 other special commands of Compilation mode: SPC and DEL for
|
|
5778 scrolling, and M-n and M-p for cursor motion.
|
|
5779
|
|
5780 M-x diff-backup compares a file with its most recent backup.
|
|
5781 If you specify the name of a backup file, `diff-backup' compares it
|
|
5782 with the source file that it is a backup of.
|
|
5783
|
|
5784 *** The View commands (such as M-x view-buffer and M-x view-file) no
|
|
5785 longer use recursive edits; instead, they switch temporarily to a
|
|
5786 different major mode (View mode) specifically designed for moving
|
|
5787 around through a buffer without editing it.
|
|
5788
|
|
5789 *** Changes in incremental search.
|
|
5790
|
|
5791 **** The character to terminate an incremental search is now RET.
|
|
5792 This is for compatibility with the way most other arguments are read.
|
|
5793
|
|
5794 To search for a newline in an incremental search, type LFD (also known
|
|
5795 as C-j).
|
|
5796
|
|
5797 **** Incremental search now maintains a ring of previous search
|
|
5798 strings. Use M-p and M-n to move through the ring to pick a search
|
|
5799 string to reuse. These commands leave the selected search ring
|
|
5800 element in the minibuffer, where you can edit it. Type C-s or C-r to
|
|
5801 finish editing and search for the chosen string.
|
|
5802
|
|
5803 **** If you type an upper case letter in incremental search, that turns
|
|
5804 off case-folding, so that you get a case-sensitive search.
|
|
5805
|
|
5806 **** If you type a space during regexp incremental search, it matches
|
|
5807 any sequence of whitespace characters. If you want to match just a space,
|
|
5808 type C-q SPC.
|
|
5809
|
|
5810 **** Incremental search is now implemented as a major mode. When you
|
|
5811 type C-s, it switches temporarily to a different keymap which defines
|
|
5812 each key to do what it ought to do for incremental search. This has
|
|
5813 next to no effect on the user-visible behavior of searching, but makes
|
|
5814 it easier to customize that behavior.
|
|
5815
|
|
5816 Emacs 19 eliminates the old variables `search-...-char' that used to
|
|
5817 be the way to specify the characters to use for various special
|
|
5818 purposes in incremental search. Instead, you can define the meaning
|
|
5819 of a character in incremental search by modifying `isearch-mode-map'.
|
|
5820
|
|
5821 *** New commands in Buffer Menu mode.
|
|
5822
|
|
5823 The command C-o now displays the current line's buffer in another
|
|
5824 window but does not select it. This is like the existing command `o'
|
|
5825 which selects the current line's buffer in another window.
|
|
5826
|
|
5827 The command % toggles the read-only flag of the current line's buffer.
|
|
5828
|
|
5829 The way to switch to a set of several buffers, including those marked
|
|
5830 with m, is now v. The q command simply quits, replacing the buffer
|
|
5831 menu buffer with the buffer that was displayed previously.
|
|
5832
|
|
5833 ** New major modes and packages.
|
|
5834
|
|
5835 *** The news reader GNUS is now installed.
|
|
5836
|
|
5837 *** There is a new interface for version control systems, called VC.
|
|
5838 It works with both RCS and SCCS; in fact, you don't really have to
|
|
5839 know which one of them is being used, because it automatically deals
|
|
5840 with either one.
|
|
5841
|
|
5842 Most of the time, the only command you have to know about is C-x C-q.
|
|
5843 This command normally toggles the read-only flag of the current
|
|
5844 buffer. If the buffer is visiting a file that is maintained with a
|
|
5845 version control system, the command still toggles read-only, but does
|
|
5846 so by checking the file in or checking it out.
|
|
5847
|
|
5848 When you check a file in, VC asks you for a log entry by popping up a
|
|
5849 buffer. Edit the entry there, then type C-c C-c when it is ready.
|
|
5850 That's when the actual checkin happens. If you change your mind about
|
|
5851 the checkin, simply switch buffers and don't ever go back to the log
|
|
5852 buffer.
|
|
5853
|
|
5854 To start using version control for a file, use the command C-x v v.
|
|
5855 This works like C-x C-q (performing the next logical version-control
|
|
5856 operation needed to change the file's writability) but it will also
|
|
5857 perform initial checkin on an unregistered file.
|
|
5858
|
|
5859 By default, VC uses RCS if RCS is installed on your machine;
|
|
5860 otherwise, SCCS. If you want to make the choice explicitly, you can do
|
|
5861 it by setting `vc-default-back-end' to the symbol `RCS' or the symbol
|
|
5862 `SCCS'.
|
|
5863
|
|
5864 You can tell when a file you visit is maintained with version control
|
|
5865 because either `RCS' or `SCCS' appears in the mode line.
|
|
5866
|
|
5867 *** A new Calendar mode has been added, the work of Edward M. Reingold.
|
|
5868 The mode can display the Gregorian calendar and a variety of other
|
|
5869 calendars at any date, and interacts with a diary facility similar to
|
|
5870 the UNIX `calendar' utility.
|
|
5871
|
|
5872 *** There is a new major mode for editing binary files: Hexl mode.
|
|
5873 To use it, use M-x hexl-find-file instead of C-x C-f to visit the file.
|
|
5874 This command converts the file's contents to hexadecimal and lets you
|
49600
|
5875 edit the translation. When you save the file, it is converted
|
25853
|
5876 automatically back to binary.
|
|
5877
|
|
5878 You can also use M-x hexl-mode to translate an existing buffer into hex.
|
49600
|
5879 Do this if you have already visited a binary file.
|
25853
|
5880
|
|
5881 Hexl mode has a few other commands:
|
|
5882
|
|
5883 C-M-d insert a byte with a code typed in decimal.
|
|
5884 C-M-o insert a byte with a code typed in octal.
|
|
5885 C-M-x insert a byte with a code typed in hex.
|
|
5886
|
|
5887 C-x [ move to the beginning of a 1k-byte "page".
|
|
5888 C-x ] move to the end of a 1k-byte "page".
|
|
5889
|
|
5890 M-g go to an address specified in hex.
|
|
5891 M-j go to an address specified in decimal.
|
|
5892
|
|
5893 C-c C-c leave hexl mode and go back to the previous major mode.
|
|
5894
|
|
5895 *** Miscellaneous new major modes include Awk mode, Icon mode, Makefile
|
|
5896 mode, Perl mode and SGML mode.
|
|
5897
|
|
5898 *** Edebug, a new source-level debugger for Emacs Lisp functions.
|
|
5899
|
|
5900 To use Edebug, use the command M-x edebug-defun to "evaluate" a
|
|
5901 function definition in an Emacs Lisp file. We put "evaluate" in
|
|
5902 quotation marks because it doesn't just evaluate the function, it also
|
|
5903 inserts additional information to support source-level debugging.
|
|
5904
|
|
5905 You must also do
|
|
5906
|
|
5907 (setq debugger 'edebug-debug)
|
|
5908
|
|
5909 to cause errors and single-stepping to use Edebug instead of the usual
|
|
5910 Emacs Lisp debugger.
|
|
5911
|
|
5912 For more information, see the Edebug manual, which should be included
|
|
5913 in the Emacs distribution.
|
|
5914
|
|
5915 *** C++ mode is like C mode, except that it understands C++ comment syntax
|
|
5916 and certain other differences between C and C++. It also has a command
|
|
5917 `fill-c++-comment' which fills a paragraph made of comment lines.
|
|
5918
|
|
5919 The command `comment-region' is useful in C++ mode for commenting out
|
|
5920 several consecutive lines, or removing the commenting out of such lines.
|
|
5921
|
|
5922 *** A new package for merging two variants of the same text.
|
|
5923
|
|
5924 It's not unusual for programmers to get their signals crossed and
|
|
5925 modify the same program in two different directions. Then somebody
|
|
5926 has to merge the two versions. The command `emerge-files' makes this
|
|
5927 easier.
|
|
5928
|
|
5929 `emerge-files' reads two file names and compares them. Then it
|
|
5930 displays three buffers: one for each file, and one for the
|
|
5931 differences.
|
|
5932
|
|
5933 If the original version of the file is available, you can make things
|
|
5934 even easier using `emerge-files-with-ancestor'. It reads three file
|
|
5935 names--variant 1, variant 2, and the common ancestor--and uses diff3
|
|
5936 to compare them.
|
|
5937
|
|
5938 You control the merging interactively. The main loop of Emerge
|
|
5939 consists of showing you one set of differences, asking you what to do
|
|
5940 about them, and doing it. You have a choice of two modes for giving
|
|
5941 directions to Emerge: "fast" mode and "edit" mode.
|
|
5942
|
|
5943 In Fast mode, Emerge commands are single characters, and ordinary
|
|
5944 Emacs commands are disabled. This makes Emerge operations fast, but
|
|
5945 prevents you from doing more than selecting the A or the B version of
|
|
5946 differences. In Edit mode, all emerge commands use the C-c prefix,
|
|
5947 and the usual Emacs commands are available. This allows editing the
|
|
5948 merge buffer, but slows down Emerge operations. Edit and fast modes
|
|
5949 are indicated by `F' and `E' in the minor modes in the mode line.
|
|
5950
|
|
5951 The Emerge commands are:
|
|
5952
|
|
5953 p go to the previous difference
|
|
5954 n go to the next difference
|
|
5955 a select the A version of this difference
|
|
5956 b select the B version of this difference
|
|
5957 j go to a particular difference (prefix argument
|
|
5958 specifies which difference) (0j suppresses display of
|
|
5959 the flags)
|
|
5960 q quit - finish the merge*
|
|
5961 f go into fast mode
|
|
5962 e go into edit mode
|
|
5963 l recenter (C-l) all three windows*
|
|
5964 - and 0 through 9
|
|
5965 prefix numeric arguments
|
|
5966 d a select the A version as the default from here down in
|
|
5967 the merge buffer*
|
|
5968 d b select the B version as the default from here down in
|
|
5969 the merge buffer*
|
|
5970 c a copy the A version of the difference into the kill
|
|
5971 ring
|
|
5972 c b copy the B version of the difference into the kill
|
|
5973 ring
|
|
5974 i a insert the A version of the difference at the point
|
|
5975 i b insert the B version of the difference at the point
|
|
5976 m put the point and mark around the difference region
|
|
5977 ^ scroll-down (like M-v) the three windows*
|
|
5978 v scroll-up (like C-v) the three windows*
|
|
5979 < scroll-left (like C-x <) the three windows*
|
|
5980 > scroll-right (like C-x >) the three windows*
|
|
5981 | reset horizontal scroll on the three windows*
|
|
5982 x 1 shrink the merge window to one line (use C-u l to restore it
|
|
5983 to full size)
|
|
5984 x a find the difference containing a location in the A buffer*
|
|
5985 x b find the difference containing a location in the B buffer*
|
|
5986 x c combine the two versions of this difference*
|
|
5987 x C combine the two versions of this difference, using a
|
|
5988 register's value as the template*
|
|
5989 x d find the difference containing a location in the merge buffer*
|
|
5990 x f show the files/buffers Emerge is operating on in Help window
|
|
5991 (use C-u l to restore windows)
|
|
5992 x j join this difference with the following one
|
|
5993 (C-u x j joins this difference with the previous one)
|
|
5994 x l show line numbers of points in A, B, and merge buffers
|
|
5995 x m change major mode of merge buffer*
|
|
5996 x s split this difference into two differences
|
|
5997 (first position the point in all three buffers to the places
|
|
5998 to split the difference)
|
|
5999 x t trim identical lines off top and bottom of difference
|
|
6000 (such lines occur when the A and B versions are
|
|
6001 identical but differ from the ancestor version)
|
|
6002 x x set the template for the x c command*
|
|
6003
|
|
6004 Normally, the merged output goes back in the first file specified.
|
|
6005 If you use a prefix argument, Emerge reads another file name to use
|
|
6006 for the output file.
|
|
6007
|
|
6008 Once Emerge has prepared the buffer of differences, it runs the hooks
|
|
6009 in `emerge-startup-hooks'.
|
|
6010
|
|
6011 *** Asm mode is a new major mode for editing files of assembler code.
|
|
6012 It defines these commands:
|
|
6013
|
|
6014 TAB tab-to-tab-stop.
|
|
6015 LFD Insert a newline and then indent using tab-to-tab-stop.
|
|
6016 : Insert a colon and then remove the indentation
|
|
6017 from before the label preceding colon. Then tab-to-tab-stop.
|
|
6018 ; Insert or align a comment.
|
|
6019
|
|
6020 *** Two-column mode lets you conveniently edit two side-by-side columns
|
|
6021 of text. It works using two side-by-side windows, each showing its
|
|
6022 own buffer.
|
|
6023
|
|
6024 Here are three ways to enter two-column mode:
|
|
6025
|
|
6026 C-x 6 2 makes the current buffer into the left-hand buffer. In the
|
|
6027 right-hand window it puts a buffer whose name is based on the current
|
|
6028 buffer's name.
|
|
6029
|
|
6030 C-x 6 b BUFFER RET makes the current buffer into the left-hand buffer,
|
|
6031 and uses buffer BUFFER as the right-hand buffer.
|
|
6032
|
|
6033 C-x 6 s splits the current buffer, which contains two-column text,
|
|
6034 into two side-by-side buffers. The old current buffer becomes the
|
|
6035 left-hand buffer, but the text in the right column is moved into the
|
|
6036 right-hand buffer. The current column specifies the split point.
|
|
6037 Splitting starts with the current line and continues to the end of the
|
|
6038 buffer.
|
|
6039
|
|
6040 C-x 6 s takes a prefix argument which specifies how many characters
|
|
6041 before point constitute the column separator. (The default argument
|
|
6042 is 1, as usual, so by default the column separator is the character
|
|
6043 before point.) Lines that don't have the column separator at the
|
|
6044 proper place remain unsplit; they stay in the left-hand buffer, and
|
|
6045 the right-hand buffer gets an empty line to correspond.
|
|
6046
|
|
6047 You can scroll both buffers together using C-x 6 SPC (scroll up), C-x
|
|
6048 6 DEL (scroll down), and C-x 6 RET (scroll up one line). C-x 6 C-l
|
|
6049 recenters both buffers together.
|
|
6050
|
|
6051 If you want to make a line which will span both columns, put it in
|
|
6052 the left-hand buffer, with an empty line in the corresponding place in
|
|
6053 the right-hand buffer.
|
|
6054
|
|
6055 When you have edited both buffers as you wish, merge them with C-x 6
|
|
6056 1. This copies the text from the right-hand buffer as a second column
|
|
6057 in the other buffer. To go back to two-column editing, use C-x 6 s.
|
|
6058
|
|
6059 Use C-x 6 d to disassociate the two buffers, leaving each as it
|
|
6060 stands. (If the other buffer, the one that was not current when you
|
|
6061 type C-x 6 d, is empty, C-x 6 d kills it.)
|
|
6062
|
|
6063 *** You can supply command arguments such as files to visit to an Emacs
|
|
6064 that is already running. To do this, you must do this in your .emacs
|
|
6065 file:
|
|
6066 (add-hook 'suspend-hook 'resume-suspend-hook)
|
|
6067 Also you must use the shellscript emacs.csh or emacs.sh, found in the
|
|
6068 etc subdirectory.
|
|
6069
|
|
6070 *** Shell mode has been completely replaced.
|
|
6071 The basic idea is the same, but there are new commands available in
|
|
6072 this mode.
|
49600
|
6073
|
25853
|
6074 TAB now completes the file name before point in the shell buffer.
|
|
6075 To get a list of all possible completions, type M-?.
|
|
6076
|
|
6077 There is a new convenient history mechanism for repeating previous
|
|
6078 commands. Use the command M-p to recall the last command; it copies
|
|
6079 the text of that command to the place where you are editing. If you
|
|
6080 repeat M-p, it replaces the copied command with the previous command.
|
|
6081 M-n is similar but goes in the opposite direction towards the present.
|
|
6082 When you find the command you wanted, you can edit it, or just
|
|
6083 resubmit it by typing RET.
|
|
6084
|
49600
|
6085 You can also use M-r and M-s to search for (respectively) earlier or
|
|
6086 later inputs starting with a given string. First type the string,
|
25853
|
6087 then type M-r to yank a previous input from the history which starts
|
|
6088 with that string. You can repeat M-r to find successively earlier
|
|
6089 inputs starting with the same string. You can start moving in the
|
|
6090 opposite direction (toward more recent inputs) by typing M-s instead
|
|
6091 of M-r. As long as you don't use any commands except M-r and M-s,
|
|
6092 they keep using the same string that you had entered initially.
|
|
6093
|
|
6094 C-c C-o kills the last batch of output from a shell command. This is
|
|
6095 useful if a shell command spews out lots of output that just gets in
|
|
6096 the way.
|
|
6097
|
|
6098 C-c C-r scrolls to display the beginning of the last batch of output
|
|
6099 at the top of the window; it also moves the cursor there.
|
|
6100
|
|
6101 C-a on a line that starts with a shell prompt moves to the end of the
|
|
6102 prompt, not to the very beginning of the line.
|
|
6103
|
|
6104 C-d typed at the end of the shell buffer sends EOF to the subshell.
|
|
6105 At any other position in the buffer, it deletes a character as usual.
|
|
6106
|
|
6107 If Emacs gets confused while trying to track changes in the shell's
|
|
6108 current directory, type M-x dirs to re-synchronize.
|
|
6109
|
|
6110 M-x send-invisible reads a line of text without echoing it, and
|
|
6111 sends it to the shell.
|
|
6112
|
49600
|
6113 If you accidentally suspend your process, use M-x comint-continue-subjob
|
25853
|
6114 to continue it.
|
49600
|
6115
|
25853
|
6116 *** There is now a convenient way to enable flow control on terminals
|
|
6117 where you can't win without it. Suppose you want to do this on
|
|
6118 VT-100 and H19 terminals; put the following in your `.emacs' file:
|
|
6119
|
|
6120 (enable-flow-control-on "vt100" "h19")
|
|
6121
|
|
6122 When flow control is enabled, you must type C-\ to get the effect of a
|
|
6123 C-s, and type C-^ to get the effect of a C-q.
|
|
6124
|
|
6125 The function `enable-flow-control' enables flow control unconditionally.
|
|
6126
|
|
6127 ** Changes in Dired
|
|
6128
|
|
6129 Dired has many new features which allow you to do these things:
|
|
6130
|
|
6131 - Rename, copy, or make links to many files at once.
|
|
6132
|
|
6133 - Make distinguishable types of marks for different operations.
|
|
6134
|
|
6135 - Display contents of subdirectories in the same Dired buffer as the
|
|
6136 parent directory.
|
|
6137
|
|
6138 *** Setting and Clearing Marks
|
|
6139
|
|
6140 There are now two kinds of marker that you can put on a file in Dired:
|
|
6141 `D' for deletion, and `*' for any other kind of operation.
|
|
6142 The `x' command deletes only files marked with `D', and most
|
|
6143 other Dired commands operate only on the files marked with `*'.
|
|
6144
|
|
6145 To mark files with `D' (also called "flagging" the files), you
|
|
6146 can use `d' as usual. Here are some commands for marking with
|
|
6147 `*' (and also for unmarking):
|
|
6148
|
|
6149 **** `m' marks the current file with `*', for an operation other than
|
|
6150 deletion.
|
|
6151
|
|
6152 **** `*' marks all executable files. With a prefix argument, it
|
|
6153 unmarks all those files.
|
|
6154
|
|
6155 **** `@' marks all symbolic links. With a prefix argument, it unmarks
|
|
6156 all those files.
|
|
6157
|
|
6158 **** `/' marks all directory files except `.' and `..'. With a prefix
|
|
6159 argument, it unmarks all those files.
|
|
6160
|
|
6161 **** M-DEL removes a specific or all marks from every file. With an
|
|
6162 argument, queries for each marked file. Type your help character,
|
|
6163 usually C-h, at that time for help.
|
|
6164
|
|
6165 **** `c' replaces all marks that use the character OLD with marks that
|
|
6166 use the character NEW. You can use almost any character as a mark
|
|
6167 character by means of this command, to distinguish various classes of
|
|
6168 files. If OLD is ` ', then the command operates on all unmarked
|
|
6169 files; if NEW is ` ', then the command unmarks the files it acts on.
|
|
6170
|
|
6171 *** Operating on Multiple Files
|
|
6172
|
|
6173 The Dired commands to operate directly on files (rename them, copy
|
|
6174 them, and so on) have been generalized to work on multiple files.
|
|
6175 There are also some additional commands in this series.
|
|
6176
|
|
6177 All of these commands use the same convention to decide which files to
|
|
6178 manipulate:
|
|
6179
|
|
6180 - If you give the command a numeric prefix argument @var{n}, it operates
|
|
6181 on the next @var{n} files, starting with the current file.
|
|
6182
|
|
6183 - Otherwise, if there are marked files, the commands operate on all the
|
|
6184 marked files.
|
|
6185
|
|
6186 - Otherwise, the command operates on the current file only.
|
|
6187
|
|
6188 These are the commands:
|
|
6189
|
|
6190 **** `C' copies the specified files. You must specify a directory to
|
|
6191 copy into, or (if copying a single file) a new name.
|
|
6192
|
|
6193 If `dired-copy-preserve-time' is non-`nil', then copying sets
|
|
6194 the modification time of the new file to be the same as that of the old
|
|
6195 file.
|
|
6196
|
|
6197 **** `R' renames the specified files. You must specify a directory to
|
|
6198 rename into, or (if renaming a single file) a new name.
|
|
6199
|
|
6200 Dired automatically changes the visited file name of buffers associated
|
|
6201 with renamed files so that they refer to the new names.
|
|
6202
|
|
6203 **** `H' makes hard links to the specified files. You must specify a
|
|
6204 directory to make the links in, or (if making just one link) the name
|
|
6205 to give the link.
|
|
6206
|
|
6207 **** `S' makes symbolic links to the specified files. You must specify
|
|
6208 a directory to make the links in, or (if making just one link) the
|
|
6209 name to give the link.
|
|
6210
|
|
6211 **** `M' changes the mode of the specified files. This calls the
|
|
6212 `chmod' program, so you can describe the desired mode change with any
|
|
6213 argument that `chmod' would handle.
|
|
6214
|
|
6215 **** `G' changes the group of the specified files.
|
|
6216
|
|
6217 **** `O' changes the owner of the specified files. (On normal systems,
|
|
6218 only the superuser can do this.)
|
|
6219
|
|
6220 The variable `dired-chown-program' specifies the name of the
|
|
6221 program to use to do the work (different systems put `chown' in
|
|
6222 different places.
|
|
6223
|
|
6224 **** `Z' compresses or uncompresses the specified files.
|
|
6225
|
|
6226 **** `L' loads the specified Emacs Lisp files.
|
|
6227
|
|
6228 **** `B' byte compiles the specified Emacs Lisp files.
|
|
6229
|
|
6230 **** `P' prints the specified files. It uses the variables
|
|
6231 `lpr-command' and `lpr-switches' just as `lpr-file' does.
|
|
6232
|
|
6233 *** Shell Commands in Dired
|
|
6234
|
|
6235 `!' reads a shell command string in the minibuffer and runs the shell
|
|
6236 command on all the specified files. There are two ways of applying a
|
|
6237 shell command to multiple files:
|
|
6238
|
|
6239 - If you use `*' in the command, then the shell command runs just
|
|
6240 once, with the list of file names substituted for the `*'.
|
|
6241
|
|
6242 Thus, `! tar cf foo.tar * RET' runs `tar' on the entire list of file
|
|
6243 names, putting them into one tar file `foo.tar'. The file names are
|
|
6244 inserted in the order that they appear in the Dired buffer.
|
|
6245
|
|
6246 - If the command string doesn't contain `*', then it runs once for
|
|
6247 each file, with the file name attached at the end. For example, `!
|
|
6248 uudecode RET' runs `uudecode' on each file.
|
|
6249
|
|
6250 To run the shell command once for each file but without being limited
|
|
6251 to putting the file name inserted in the middle, use a shell loop.
|
|
6252 For example, this shell command would run `uuencode' on each of the
|
|
6253 specified files, writing the output into a corresponding `.uu' file:
|
|
6254
|
|
6255 for file in *; uuencode $file $file >$file.uu; done
|
|
6256
|
|
6257 The working directory for the shell command is the top level directory
|
|
6258 of the Dired buffer.
|
|
6259
|
|
6260 *** Regular Expression File Name Substitution
|
|
6261
|
|
6262 **** `% m REGEXP RET' marks all files whose names match the regular
|
|
6263 expression REGEXP.
|
|
6264
|
|
6265 Only the non-directory part of the file name is used in matching. Use
|
|
6266 `^' and `$' to anchor matches. Exclude subdirs by hiding them.
|
|
6267
|
|
6268 **** `% d REGEXP RET' flags for deletion all files whose names match
|
|
6269 the regular expression REGEXP.
|
|
6270
|
|
6271 **** `% R', `% C', `% H', `% S'
|
|
6272
|
|
6273 These four commands rename, copy, make hard links and make soft links,
|
|
6274 in each case computing the new name by regular expression substitution
|
|
6275 from the name of the old file. They effectively perform
|
|
6276 `query-replace-regexp' on the selected file names in the Dired buffer.
|
|
6277
|
|
6278 The commands read two arguments: a regular expression, and a
|
|
6279 substitution pattern. Each selected file name is matched against the
|
|
6280 regular expression, and then the part which matched is replaced with
|
|
6281 the substitution pattern. You can use `\&' and `\DIGIT' in the
|
|
6282 substitution pattern to refer to all or part of the old file name.
|
|
6283
|
|
6284 If the regular expression matches more than once in a file name,
|
|
6285 only the first match is replaced.
|
|
6286
|
|
6287 Normally, the replacement process does not consider the directory names;
|
|
6288 it operates on the file name within the directory. If you specify a
|
|
6289 prefix argument of zero, then replacement affects entire file name.
|
|
6290
|
|
6291 To apply the command to all files matching the same regexp that you
|
|
6292 use in the command, mark those files with `% m REGEXP RET', then use
|
|
6293 the same regular expression in `% R'. To make this easier, `% R' uses
|
|
6294 as a default the last regular expression specified in a `%' command.
|
|
6295
|
|
6296 *** Dired Case Conversion
|
|
6297
|
|
6298 **** `% u' renames each of the selected files to an upper case name.
|
|
6299
|
|
6300 **** `% l' renames each of the selected files to a lower case name.
|
|
6301
|
|
6302 *** File Comparison with Dired
|
|
6303
|
|
6304 **** `=' compares the current file with another file (the file at the
|
|
6305 mark), by running the `diff' program. The file at the mark is given
|
|
6306 to `diff' first.
|
|
6307
|
|
6308 **** `M-=' compares the current file with its backup file. If there
|
|
6309 are several numerical backups, it uses the most recent one. If this
|
|
6310 file is a backup, it is compared with its original.
|
|
6311
|
|
6312 The backup file is the first file given to `diff'.
|
|
6313
|
|
6314 *** Subdirectories in Dired
|
|
6315
|
|
6316 You can display more than one directory in one Dired buffer.
|
|
6317 The simplest way to do this is to specify the options `-lR' for
|
|
6318 running `ls'. That produces a recursive directory listing showing
|
|
6319 all subdirectories, all within the same Dired buffer.
|
|
6320
|
|
6321 You can also insert the contents of a particular subdirectory with the
|
|
6322 `i' command. Use this command on the line that describes a file which
|
|
6323 is a directory. Inserted subdirectory contents follow the top-level
|
|
6324 directory of the Dired buffer, just as they do in `ls -lR' output.
|
|
6325
|
|
6326 If the subdirectory's contents are already present in the buffer, the
|
|
6327 `i' command just moves to it (type `l' to refresh it). It sets the
|
|
6328 Emacs mark before moving, so C-x C-x takes you back to the old
|
|
6329 position in the buffer.
|
|
6330
|
|
6331 When you have subdirectories in the Dired buffer, you can use the page
|
|
6332 motion commands C-x [ and C-x ] to move by entire directories.
|
|
6333
|
|
6334 The following commands move up and down in the tree of directories
|
|
6335 in one Dired buffer:
|
|
6336
|
|
6337 **** C-M-u Go up to the parent directory's headerline.
|
|
6338
|
|
6339 **** C-M-d Go down in the tree, to the first subdirectory's
|
|
6340 headerline.
|
|
6341
|
|
6342 **** C-M-n Go to next subdirectory headerline, regardless of level.
|
|
6343
|
|
6344 **** C-M-p Go to previous subdirectory headerline, regardless of
|
|
6345 level.
|
|
6346
|
|
6347 *** Hiding Subdirectories
|
|
6348
|
|
6349 "Hiding" a subdirectory means to make it invisible, except for its
|
|
6350 headerline. Files inside a hidden subdirectory are never considered
|
|
6351 by Dired. For example, the commands to operate on marked files ignore
|
|
6352 files in hidden directories even if they are marked.
|
|
6353
|
|
6354 **** `$' hides or unhides the current subdirectory and move to next
|
|
6355 subdirectory. A prefix argument serves as a repeat count.
|
|
6356
|
|
6357 **** `M-$' hides all subdirectories, leaving only their header lines.
|
|
6358 Or, if at least one subdirectory is currently hidden, it makes
|
|
6359 everything visible again. You can use this command to get an overview
|
|
6360 in very deep directory trees or to move quickly to subdirectories far
|
|
6361 away.
|
|
6362
|
|
6363 *** Editing the Dired Buffer
|
|
6364
|
|
6365 **** `l' updates the specified files in a Dired buffer. This means
|
|
6366 reading their current status from the file system and changing the
|
|
6367 buffer to reflect it properly.
|
|
6368
|
|
6369 If you use this command on a subdirectory header line, it updates the
|
|
6370 contents of the subdirectory.
|
|
6371
|
|
6372 **** `g' updates the entire contents of the Dired buffer. It preserves
|
|
6373 all marks except for those on files that have vanished. Hidden
|
|
6374 subdirectories are updated but remain hidden.
|
|
6375
|
|
6376 **** `k' kills all marked lines (not the files). With a prefix
|
|
6377 argument, it kills that many lines starting with the current line.
|
|
6378
|
|
6379 This command does not delete files; it just deletes text from the Dired
|
|
6380 buffer.
|
|
6381
|
|
6382 If you kill the line for a file that is a directory, then its contents
|
|
6383 are also deleted from the buffer. Typing `C-u k' on the header line
|
|
6384 for a subdirectory is another way to delete a subdirectory from the
|
|
6385 Dired buffer.
|
|
6386
|
|
6387 *** `find' and Dired.
|
|
6388
|
|
6389 To search for files with names matching a wildcard pattern use
|
|
6390 `find-name-dired'. Its arguments are DIRECTORY and
|
|
6391 PATTERN. It selects all the files in DIRECTORY or its
|
|
6392 subdirectories whose own names match PATTERN.
|
|
6393
|
|
6394 The files thus selected are displayed in a Dired buffer in which the
|
|
6395 ordinary Dired commands are available.
|
|
6396
|
|
6397 If you want to test the contents of files, rather than their names, use
|
|
6398 `find-grep-dired'. This command takes two minibuffer arguments,
|
|
6399 DIRECTORY and REGEXP; it selects all the files in
|
|
6400 DIRECTORY or its subdirectories that contain a match for
|
|
6401 REGEXP. It works by running `find' and `grep'.
|
|
6402
|
|
6403 The most general command in this series is `find-dired', which lets
|
|
6404 you specify any condition that `find' can test. It takes two
|
|
6405 minibuffer arguments, DIRECTORY and FIND-ARGS; it runs `find' in
|
|
6406 DIRECTORY with using FIND-ARGS as the arguments to `find' specifying
|
|
6407 which files to accept. To use this command, you need to know how to
|
|
6408 use `find'.
|
|
6409
|
|
6410 ** New amusements and novelties.
|
|
6411
|
|
6412 *** `M-x mpuz' displays a multiplication puzzle, in which each letter
|
|
6413 stands for a digit, and you must determine which digit. The puzzles
|
|
6414 are determined randomly, so they are always different.
|
|
6415
|
|
6416 *** `M-x gomoku' plays the game Gomoku with you. It needs more work.
|
|
6417
|
|
6418 *** `M-x spook' adds a line of randomly chosen keywords to an outgoing
|
|
6419 mail message. The keywords are chosen from a list of words that
|
|
6420 suggest you are discussing something subversive.
|
|
6421
|
|
6422 The idea is that the NSA reads all messages that contain keywords
|
|
6423 suggesting they might be interested, and that adding these lines could
|
|
6424 help to overload them. I would guess that they have modified their
|
|
6425 program by now to ignore these lines of keywords; perhaps the program
|
|
6426 can be updated if some clever hacker can determine what criterion they
|
|
6427 actually use now.
|
|
6428
|
|
6429 ** Installation changes
|
|
6430
|
|
6431 *** The configure script has been provided to help with the
|
|
6432 installation process. It takes the place of editing the Makefiles and
|
|
6433 src/config.h, and can often guess the appropriate operating system to
|
|
6434 use for a particular machine type. See INSTALL for a more detailed
|
|
6435 description of the steps required for installation.
|
|
6436
|
|
6437 *** If you create a Lisp file named `site-start.el', Emacs loads the file
|
|
6438 whenever it starts up.
|
|
6439
|
|
6440 *** A new Lisp variable, `data-directory', indicates the directory
|
|
6441 containing the DOC file, tutorial, copying agreement, and other
|
|
6442 familiar `etc' files. The value of `data-directory' is a simple string.
|
|
6443 The default should be set at build time, and the person installing
|
|
6444 Emacs should place all the data files in this directory. The `help.el'
|
|
6445 functions that look for docstrings and information files check this
|
|
6446 variable. All Emacs Lisp packages should also be coded so that they
|
|
6447 refer to `data-directory' to find data files.
|
|
6448
|
|
6449 *** The PURESIZE definition has been moved from config.h to its own
|
|
6450 file, puresize.h. Since almost every file of C source in the
|
|
6451 distribution depends on config.h, but only alloc.c and data.c depend
|
|
6452 on puresize.h, this means that changing the value of PURESIZE causes
|
|
6453 only those two files to be recompiled.
|
|
6454
|
|
6455 *** The makefile at the top of the Emacs source tree now supports a
|
|
6456 `dist' target, which creates a compressed tar file suitable for
|
|
6457 distribution, using the contents of the source tree. Object files,
|
|
6458 old file versions, executables, DOC files, and other
|
|
6459 architecture-specific or easy-to-recreate files are not included in
|
|
6460 the tar file.
|
|
6461
|
33149
|
6462 * For older news, see the file ONEWS.4. For Lisp changes in (the first
|
25853
|
6463 * release of) Emacs 19, see the file LNEWS.
|
|
6464
|
|
6465 ----------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
6466 Copyright information:
|
|
6467
|
|
6468 Copyright (C) 1993, 1994, 1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
|
|
6469
|
|
6470 Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies
|
|
6471 of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the
|
|
6472 copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved,
|
|
6473 thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn.
|
|
6474
|
|
6475 Permission is granted to distribute modified versions
|
|
6476 of this document, or of portions of it,
|
|
6477 under the above conditions, provided also that they
|
|
6478 carry prominent notices stating who last changed them.
|
|
6479
|
|
6480 Local variables:
|
|
6481 mode: outline
|
|
6482 paragraph-separate: "[ ]*$"
|
|
6483 end:
|
|
6484
|
52401
|
6485 arch-tag: 944be39b-afe8-4217-9977-c745b68a7ca2
|